Prove2Me
Navigate
DiscoverCollectionsFormalpediaBlogsUsersMomentumMy Missions+
Prove2Me
⌕
Log in

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

Dynamical Systems

164 missions · 68 completed

Missions

Open96Completed68All164
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchProbabilityStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Dynamics of Stochastic Approximation Algorithms 4: Subgaussian Martingale Noise with Σ exp(−c/γ_n) < ∞ for Every c > 0 Satisfies Assumption A1 Almost SurelyResearch Paper

Motivation

A stochastic approximation algorithm is a recursion

xn+1−xn=γn+1(F(xn)+Un+1)x_{n+1}-x_n=\gamma_{n+1}\big(F(x_n)+U_{n+1}\big)xn+1​−xn​=γn+1​(F(xn​)+Un+1​)

in Rd\mathbb R^dRd, where FFF is a vector field, γn\gamma_nγn​ are small step sizes and Un+1U_{n+1}Un+1​ is noise. Such recursions go back to Robbins and Monro's root-finding scheme (Robbins–Monro 1951) and underlie stochastic gradient descent, temporal-difference learning, adaptive control and learning in games. The ODE method studies them by comparing the iterates with the trajectories of x˙=F(x)\dot x=F(x)x˙=F(x).

Benaïm's lecture notes (Benaïm 1999) organize the ODE method in two steps. A deterministic step, Proposition 4.1, shows that whenever the noise satisfies a condition called A1 (together with a boundedness condition on the iterates), the interpolated process is an asymptotic pseudotrajectory of the flow of FFF. A probabilistic step then verifies A1 for concrete noise models. Proposition 4.2 does this for martingale difference noise with bounded qqq-th moments, at the price of step sizes with ∑nγn1+q/2<∞\sum_n\gamma_n^{1+q/2}<\infty∑n​γn1+q/2​<∞. This mission formalizes the second verification, Proposition 4.4: when the noise is subgaussian, A1 holds almost surely under the much weaker requirement that ∑ne−c/γn<∞\sum_ne^{-c/\gamma_n}<\infty∑n​e−c/γn​<∞ for every c>0c>0c>0, which allows step sizes decaying only slightly faster than 1/log⁡n1/\log n1/logn. The notes attribute the result to Duflo (1997), see also Kushner and Yin (1997) and Benaïm and Hirsch (1996).

Setting

Let {γn}n≥1\{\gamma_n\}_{n\ge1}{γn​}n≥1​ be a deterministic sequence with γn≥0\gamma_n\ge0γn​≥0, ∑nγn=∞\sum_n\gamma_n=\infty∑n​γn​=∞ and γn→0\gamma_n\to0γn​→0 (a step sequence). Put τ0=0\tau_0=0τ0​=0, τn=∑i=1nγi\tau_n=\sum_{i=1}^n\gamma_iτn​=∑i=1n​γi​, and let

m(t)=sup⁡{k≥0: t≥τk}m(t)=\sup\{k\ge0:\ t\ge\tau_k\}m(t)=sup{k≥0: t≥τk​}

be the index of the step that contains time t≥0t\ge0t≥0. For a sequence {Un}n≥1\{U_n\}_{n\ge1}{Un​}n≥1​ define the piecewise constant processes Uˉ(t)=Um(t)+1\bar U(t)=U_{m(t)+1}Uˉ(t)=Um(t)+1​ and γˉ(t)=γm(t)+1\bar\gamma(t)=\gamma_{m(t)+1}γˉ​(t)=γm(t)+1​, so that step n+1n+1n+1 occupies the time interval [τn,τn+1)[\tau_n,\tau_{n+1})[τn​,τn+1​) of length γn+1\gamma_{n+1}γn+1​.

Assumption A1 asks that for every T>0T>0T>0

lim⁡n→∞sup⁡{∥∑i=nk−1γi+1Ui+1∥: k=n+1,…,m(τn+T)}=0,\lim_{n\to\infty}\sup\Big\{\Big\|\sum_{i=n}^{k-1}\gamma_{i+1}U_{i+1}\Big\|:\ k=n+1,\dots,m(\tau_n+T)\Big\}=0,n→∞lim​sup{​i=n∑k−1​γi+1​Ui+1​​: k=n+1,…,m(τn​+T)}=0,

or, in the form the notes call equivalent, lim⁡t→∞Δ(t,T)=0\lim_{t\to\infty}\Delta(t,T)=0limt→∞​Δ(t,T)=0 for every T>0T>0T>0, where

Δ(t,T)=sup⁡0≤h≤T∥∫tt+hUˉ(s) ds∥.\Delta(t,T)=\sup_{0\le h\le T}\Big\|\int_t^{t+h}\bar U(s)\,ds\Big\|.Δ(t,T)=0≤h≤Tsup​​∫tt+h​Uˉ(s)ds​.

Let (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P) be a probability space with a nondecreasing sequence {Fn}\{\mathcal F_n\}{Fn​} of sub-σ\sigmaσ-algebras, and F:Rd→RdF:\mathbb R^d\to\mathbb R^dF:Rd→Rd continuous. A sequence {xn}\{x_n\}{xn​} given by the recursion above is a Robbins–Monro algorithm if γ\gammaγ is deterministic, UnU_nUn​ is Fn\mathcal F_nFn​-measurable, and E(Un+1∣Fn)=0E(U_{n+1}\mid\mathcal F_n)=0E(Un+1​∣Fn​)=0. The noise is subgaussian if there is a number Γ>0\Gamma>0Γ>0 such that for all nnn and all θ∈Rd\theta\in\mathbb R^dθ∈Rd

E(exp⁡⟨θ,Un+1⟩ ∣ Fn)≤exp⁡(Γ2∥θ∥2).E\big(\exp\langle\theta,U_{n+1}\rangle\,\big|\,\mathcal F_n\big)\le\exp\Big(\frac\Gamma2\|\theta\|^2\Big).E(exp⟨θ,Un+1​⟩​Fn​)≤exp(2Γ​∥θ∥2).

Bounded noise, ∥Un∥≤Γ\|U_n\|\le\sqrt\Gamma∥Un​∥≤Γ​, is an example.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 4.4

For a Robbins–Monro algorithm with subgaussian noise and a deterministic step sequence such that

∑ne−c/γn<∞for each c>0,\sum_ne^{-c/\gamma_n}<\infty\qquad\text{for each }c>0,n∑​e−c/γn​<∞for each c>0,

with probability one the realised noise sequence satisfies A1, in both of its forms, simultaneously for all T>0T>0T>0.

Milestones

  1. The exponential supermartingale. For every θ∈Rd\theta\in\mathbb R^dθ∈Rd,
Zn(θ)=exp⁡[∑i=1n⟨θ,γiUi⟩−Γ2∑i=1nγi2∥θ∥2]Z_n(\theta)=\exp\Big[\sum_{i=1}^n\langle\theta,\gamma_iU_i\rangle-\frac\Gamma2\sum_{i=1}^n\gamma_i^2\|\theta\|^2\Big]Zn​(θ)=exp[i=1∑n​⟨θ,γi​Ui​⟩−2Γ​i=1∑n​γi2​∥θ∥2]

is a supermartingale. 2. Directional maximal tail bound. For every unit vector eee, α>0\alpha>0α>0, nnn and T>0T>0T>0,

P(sup⁡n<k≤m(τn+T)⟨e,∑i=nk−1γi+1Ui+1⟩≥α)≤exp⁡(−α22Γ∑i=nm(τn+T)−1γi+12).P\Big(\sup_{n<k\le m(\tau_n+T)}\Big\langle e,\sum_{i=n}^{k-1}\gamma_{i+1}U_{i+1}\Big\rangle\ge\alpha\Big)\le\exp\Big(\frac{-\alpha^2}{2\Gamma\sum_{i=n}^{m(\tau_n+T)-1}\gamma_{i+1}^2}\Big).P(n<k≤m(τn​+T)sup​⟨e,i=n∑k−1​γi+1​Ui+1​⟩≥α)≤exp(2Γ∑i=nm(τn​+T)−1​γi+12​−α2​).
  1. Eq. (18). There are C,C′>0C,C'>0C,C′>0 depending only on ddd and Γ\GammaΓ with
P(Δ(t,T)≥α)≤Cexp⁡(−α2C′∫tt+Tγˉ(s) ds)(t≥0, T>0, α>0).P(\Delta(t,T)\ge\alpha)\le C\exp\Big(\frac{-\alpha^2}{C'\int_t^{t+T}\bar\gamma(s)\,ds}\Big)\qquad(t\ge0,\ T>0,\ \alpha>0).P(Δ(t,T)≥α)≤Cexp(C′∫tt+T​γˉ​(s)ds−α2​)(t≥0, T>0, α>0).
  1. Block comparison. Δ(t,T)≤2Δ(kT,T)+Δ((k+1)T,T)\Delta(t,T)\le2\Delta(kT,T)+\Delta((k+1)T,T)Δ(t,T)≤2Δ(kT,T)+Δ((k+1)T,T) for kT≤t<(k+1)TkT\le t<(k+1)TkT≤t<(k+1)T.

Significance

Proposition 4.4 is the sufficient condition for the ODE method when the noise has Gaussian-type tails. Its step-size condition holds whenever γnlog⁡n→0\gamma_n\log n\to0γn​logn→0, so it admits steps that decrease far more slowly than the ∑γn2<∞\sum\gamma_n^2<\infty∑γn2​<∞ of the classical L2L^2L2 theory; slowly decreasing steps are what practitioners use to keep algorithms responsive. Combined with Proposition 4.1 it shows that the interpolated process of such an algorithm, with bounded iterates, is almost surely an asymptotic pseudotrajectory of the flow of FFF, and the limit set theorems of the notes then locate the limit points of the algorithm.

The result is proved in the notes and in the cited literature; it has not, to our knowledge, been machine-checked. A formal proof would add reusable pieces: an exponential supermartingale and maximal inequality for vector-valued martingale differences with a conditional subgaussian bound (Mathlib's conditional subgaussian notion is scalar), a Borel–Cantelli argument along the grid kTkTkT, and the continuous-time bookkeeping of Uˉ\bar UUˉ, γˉ\bar\gammaγˉ​ and Δ\DeltaΔ shared with the other missions of this series.

Difficulty

The moment method of Proposition 4.2 does not reach this regime: any fixed polynomial moment of the window sums decays only polynomially in the window's step sizes, and under ∑e−c/γn<∞\sum e^{-c/\gamma_n}<\infty∑e−c/γn​<∞ alone polynomial bounds are not summable over windows. Exponential tail bounds are needed, and they must be maximal (uniform over the window) and must hold for the norm of a vector, not only for a scalar. The continuous-time deviation Δ(t,T)\Delta(t,T)Δ(t,T) involves partial steps at both ends of [t,t+h][t,t+h][t,t+h], so the bound must be stated in terms of ∫tt+Tγˉ\int_t^{t+T}\bar\gamma∫tt+T​γˉ​ rather than a sum over whole steps, with constants that do not depend on ttt, TTT or α\alphaα. Finally, A1 quantifies over all T>0T>0T>0: the almost-sure statement must hold on a single event of full probability for every TTT.

Formalization scope

The space is Rd\mathbb R^dRd as EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin d) (the paper writes Rm\mathbb R^mRm); time is real. The sequences γ\gammaγ and UUU are indexed by N\mathbb NN, and their values at 000 are unused, as the paper indexes them from 111. The filtration is a Mathlib Filtration ℕ; Un+1U_{n+1}Un+1​ is Fn+1\mathcal F_{n+1}Fn+1​-strongly measurable and integrable, and E(Un+1∣Fn)=0E(U_{n+1}\mid\mathcal F_n)=0E(Un+1​∣Fn​)=0 almost surely. The subgaussian condition requires exp⁡⟨θ,Un+1⟩\exp\langle\theta,U_{n+1}\rangleexp⟨θ,Un+1​⟩ to be integrable for every θ\thetaθ and nnn. The summand e−c/γne^{-c/\gamma_n}e−c/γn​ is taken to be 000 when γn=0\gamma_n=0γn​=0, its limiting value. The suprema in A1 and Δ\DeltaΔ are taken in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]; the supremum over an empty range of kkk is 000. In Eq. (18) the constants are chosen before the probability space, the algorithm and t,T,αt,T,\alphat,T,α.

The following readings are excluded and are not acceptable formalizations: a subgaussian condition that holds vacuously because the exponential is not integrable (Lean's conditional expectation of a non-integrable function is 000); a summability condition made trivial or false by the convention c/0=0c/0=0c/0=0; and the conclusion "for each TTT, A1 holds almost surely" in place of "almost surely, A1 holds for all TTT". The second sentence of Proposition 4.4 (the asymptotic pseudotrajectory conclusion) is outside this mission.

All hypotheses are satisfiable: U=0U=0U=0, x=0x=0x=0, F=0F=0F=0, Γ=1\Gamma=1Γ=1 and γn=1/n\gamma_n=1/nγn​=1/n satisfy every one of them.

Contributions welcome: a maximal inequality for nonnegative supermartingales in the form needed here, vector subgaussian tail bounds for martingale transforms with deterministic weights (reusable well beyond this mission), lemmas on the step processes and Δ\DeltaΔ (measurability, local integrability, additivity), and the proofs of the milestones.

Selected references

  • M. Benaïm, Dynamics of Stochastic Approximation Algorithms, Séminaire de Probabilités XXXIII, Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1709, Springer, 1999, pp. 1–68. https://doi.org/10.1007/BFb0096509
  • M. Duflo, Random Iterative Models, Applications of Mathematics 34, Springer, 1997.
  • H. J. Kushner and G. G. Yin, Stochastic Approximation Algorithms and Applications, Springer, 1997.
  • M. Benaïm and M. W. Hirsch, Asymptotic pseudotrajectories and chain recurrent flows, with applications, Journal of Dynamics and Differential Equations 8 (1996), 141–176. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02218617
  • H. Robbins and S. Monro, A stochastic approximation method, Annals of Mathematical Statistics 22 (1951), 400–407. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177729586
10 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchProbabilityStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Dynamics of Stochastic Approximation Algorithms 6: An Attractor Whose Basin Meets the Attainable Set Contains the Limit Set with Positive ProbabilityResearch Paper

Motivation

A stochastic approximation algorithm is a recursion xn+1=xn+γn+1(F(xn)+Un+1)x_{n+1}=x_n+\gamma_{n+1}\big(F(x_n)+U_{n+1}\big)xn+1​=xn​+γn+1​(F(xn​)+Un+1​) with decreasing step sizes γn\gamma_nγn​ and a noise term Un+1U_{n+1}Un+1​. Recursions of this form appear in stochastic gradient methods, adaptive control, learning in games (fictitious play, reinforcement learning) and urn models. The ODE method compares the iterates with the solutions of x˙=F(x)\dot x=F(x)x˙=F(x). In Benaïm's lecture notes (Benaïm 1999), the comparison is phrased through the continuous-time interpolated process XXX. Under standard noise conditions, XXX is almost surely an asymptotic pseudotrajectory of the flow of FFF, and its limit set is almost surely internally chain transitive.

That theorem constrains where the process may end up. It does not say which of several candidate sets the process actually reaches. When the ODE has several attractors, for example several stable equilibria of a learning dynamic or several stable compositions of an urn, an application needs to know that each attractor is reached with positive probability. Section 7 of the notes answers this question. The answer is a criterion of attainability: if the process can, with positive probability and at arbitrarily late times, enter the basin of an attractor, then it converges to that attractor with positive probability.

Timeline.

  • Kushner and Clark (1978) proved convergence statements for processes that visit a compact subset of the domain of attraction of an asymptotically stable equilibrium infinitely often.
  • Arthur, Ermoliev and Kaniovski (1983) and Pemantle (1990) studied urn processes whose limit points depend on the trajectory.
  • Benaïm (1997) and Duflo (1997, Random Iterative Models) developed the attainability argument for general stochastic approximation processes.
  • Benaïm (1999) states it for arbitrary attractors of a semiflow on a locally compact metric space, under a single conditional shadowing condition (24).

Setting

Let (M,d)(M,d)(M,d) be a metric space and let Φ=(Φt)t≥0\Phi=(\Phi_t)_{t\ge0}Φ=(Φt​)t≥0​ be a semiflow on MMM: a continuous map (t,x)↦Φt(x)(t,x)\mapsto\Phi_t(x)(t,x)↦Φt​(x) with Φ0=Id\Phi_0=\mathrm{Id}Φ0​=Id and Φt+s=Φt∘Φs\Phi_{t+s}=\Phi_t\circ\Phi_sΦt+s​=Φt​∘Φs​.

  • A set AAA is invariant if Φt(A)=A\Phi_t(A)=AΦt​(A)=A for all t≥0t\ge0t≥0, and positively invariant if Φt(A)⊂A\Phi_t(A)\subset AΦt​(A)⊂A.
  • An attractor is a nonempty compact invariant set AAA with a neighbourhood WWW on which dist⁡(Φtx,A)→0\operatorname{dist}(\Phi_tx,A)\to0dist(Φt​x,A)→0 uniformly. Its basin B(A)B(A)B(A) is the set of points xxx with dist⁡(Φtx,A)→0\operatorname{dist}(\Phi_tx,A)\to0dist(Φt​x,A)→0.
  • A continuous curve X:R+→MX:\mathbb R_+\to MX:R+​→M is an asymptotic pseudotrajectory if sup⁡0≤h≤Td(X(t+h),Φh(X(t)))→0\sup_{0\le h\le T}d(X(t+h),\Phi_h(X(t)))\to0sup0≤h≤T​d(X(t+h),Φh​(X(t)))→0 as t→∞t\to\inftyt→∞, for every T>0T>0T>0.
  • The limit set of XXX is L(X)=⋂t≥0X([t,∞))‾L(X)=\bigcap_{t\ge0}\overline{X([t,\infty))}L(X)=⋂t≥0​X([t,∞))​.
  • For T>0T>0T>0, dX(T)=sup⁡k∈Nd(ΦT(X(kT)),X(kT+T))d_X(T)=\sup_{k\in\mathbb N}d(\Phi_T(X(kT)),X(kT+T))dX​(T)=supk∈N​d(ΦT​(X(kT)),X(kT+T)).

Now let X=(X(t))t≥0X=(X(t))_{t\ge0}X=(X(t))t≥0​ be a process on a probability space (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P) with continuous paths in MMM, adapted to a filtration (Ft)t≥0(\mathcal F_t)_{t\ge0}(Ft​)t≥0​. The standing assumption of Section 7 is that for all δ>0\delta>0δ>0, T>0T>0T>0 and t≥0t\ge0t≥0,

P(sup⁡s≥t sup⁡0≤h≤Td(X(s+h),Φh(X(s)))≥δ ∣ Ft)≤w(t,δ,T)(24)P\Big(\sup_{s\ge t}\ \sup_{0\le h\le T}d\big(X(s+h),\Phi_h(X(s))\big)\ge\delta\ \Big|\ \mathcal F_t\Big)\le w(t,\delta,T)\tag{24}P(s≥tsup​ 0≤h≤Tsup​d(X(s+h),Φh​(X(s)))≥δ ​ Ft​)≤w(t,δ,T)(24)

for a function w≥0w\ge0w≥0 with w(t,δ,T)↓0w(t,\delta,T)\downarrow0w(t,δ,T)↓0 as t→∞t\to\inftyt→∞.

A point ppp is attainable if P(∃s≥t:X(s)∈U)>0P(\exists s\ge t: X(s)\in U)>0P(∃s≥t:X(s)∈U)>0 for every t>0t>0t>0 and every open neighbourhood UUU of ppp. Att(X)\mathrm{Att}(X)Att(X) is the set of attainable points.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 7.3, first statement

If MMM is locally compact, AAA is an attractor of Φ\PhiΦ, and Att(X)∩B(A)≠∅\mathrm{Att}(X)\cap B(A)\neq\emptysetAtt(X)∩B(A)=∅, then

P(L(X)⊂A)>0.P\big(L(X)\subset A\big)>0 .P(L(X)⊂A)>0.

This statement contains no constants and no rates, so it does not depend on how (24) is quantified for a particular algorithm.

Theorem 7.3, second statement

If UUU is open and relatively compact with U‾⊂B(A)\overline U\subset B(A)U⊂B(A), there are T,δ>0T,\delta>0T,δ>0, depending only on UUU (and on Φ\PhiΦ, AAA), such that for every process satisfying the standing assumption and every t≥0t\ge0t≥0

P(L(X)⊂A)≥(1−w(t,δ,T)) P(∃s≥t: X(s)∈U).P\big(L(X)\subset A\big)\ge\big(1-w(t,\delta,T)\big)\,P\big(\exists s\ge t:\ X(s)\in U\big).P(L(X)⊂A)≥(1−w(t,δ,T))P(∃s≥t: X(s)∈U).

Milestones

  • Lemma 6.8. For a nonempty compact K⊂B(A)K\subset B(A)K⊂B(A) there are T,δ>0T,\delta>0T,δ>0 such that every asymptotic pseudotrajectory with X(0)∈KX(0)\in KX(0)∈K and dX(T)<δd_X(T)<\deltadX​(T)<δ has L(X)⊂AL(X)\subset AL(X)⊂A.
  • Lemma 7.1, in three parts:
    • Att(X)\mathrm{Att}(X)Att(X) is closed;
    • it is positively invariant;
    • it contains L(X)L(X)L(X) almost surely.

Significance

The result. Theorem 7.3 turns a question about the long-run limit of a random process into a question about where the process can go. Attainability is usually checked by a controllability argument: the noise can push the iterates in every direction. For urn processes with an urn function mapping the simplex into its interior, every point is attainable (Example 7.2 of the notes). Then every attractor of the mean ODE is reached with positive probability. Combined with nonconvergence results for unstable sets (Section 9 of the notes), this characterizes the possible limits of many learning and urn processes. Theorem 7.3 is the positive half of that picture.

Formalizing it. The theorem has a published proof (p. 32 of the notes) and no machine-checked version. A formal proof needs the following:

  • a precise reading of the conditional shadowing condition (24) as a conditional expectation of an indicator;
  • the stopping-time decomposition of the event {∃s≥t:X(s)∈U}\{\exists s\ge t: X(s)\in U\}{∃s≥t:X(s)∈U} over dyadic times;
  • the deterministic Lemma 6.8, which rests on the limit set theorem for precompact asymptotic pseudotrajectories (Theorem 5.7 of the notes, the subject of mission 1 of this series).

Difficulty

The obvious argument says: once XXX enters a compact part of the basin, the flow carries it into AAA. That fails because XXX is not a trajectory of the flow. Each window of length TTT adds an error, and errors over infinitely many windows can push the process out of the basin.

Two things are needed instead:

  • A uniform version of the deterministic statement, with TTT and δ\deltaδ fixed in advance from the compact set alone. This is Lemma 6.8, which needs local compactness of MMM and the structure of limit sets of asymptotic pseudotrajectories.
  • A probabilistic step that applies (24) at the random time when XXX first enters UUU. That time is not a stopping time on a continuum, and conditioning at it needs care.

A naive union bound over all times is useless: it does not use the conditional form of (24).

Formalization scope

  • The semiflow is Mathlib's Flow ℝ≥0 M on a metric space; local compactness is LocallyCompactSpace M.
  • The process is X : ℝ≥0 → Ω → M with continuous paths. The paper's alternative of càdlàg paths is not covered.
  • Adaptedness is Borel measurability of X(t)X(t)X(t) with respect to Ft\mathcal F_tFt​, for a Mathlib Filtration ℝ≥0. PPP is a probability measure.
  • The suprema in (24) and in dX(T)d_X(T)dX​(T) are computed in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞] with the extended distance, so that "sup ≥δ\ge\delta≥δ" and "sup <δ<\delta<δ" are exact even when the supremum is infinite or not attained.
  • The conditional probability in (24) is the conditional expectation of the indicator of the event. The event is required to be measurable, so the condition cannot hold vacuously through a junk conditional expectation.
  • www is required to be both nonincreasing in ttt and convergent to 000.
  • The events {L(X)⊂A}\{L(X)\subset A\}{L(X)⊂A} and {∃s≥t:X(s)∈U}\{\exists s\ge t: X(s)\in U\}{∃s≥t:X(s)∈U} are measured with PPP as an outer measure, so no measurability hypothesis is added for them.
  • In the second statement of Theorem 7.3, TTT and δ\deltaδ are chosen before the probability space, the process, www and ttt.
  • Invariance in the definition of an attractor is the equality Φt(A)=A\Phi_t(A)=AΦt​(A)=A, not inclusion.
  • The almost-sure clause of Lemma 7.1 is stated for separable MMM. Without separability it cannot be proved in ordinary set theory.

These choices rule out the trivializing formalizations: a conditional-probability hypothesis that holds vacuously, invariance read as inclusion, constants T,δT,\deltaT,δ that depend on the process or on ttt, and a probability bound www without monotonicity.

A complete development needs:

  • limit sets of asymptotic pseudotrajectories and the fact that an internally chain transitive set meeting the basin of an attractor lies in the attractor (shared with missions 1 and 5 of this series);
  • measurability of path functionals of continuous processes;
  • conditioning on events of the form {τ=tn(k)}\{\tau=t_n(k)\}{τ=tn​(k)} at dyadic times.

The first and second are reusable well beyond this mission. Contributions toward either, and alternative proofs of Lemma 6.8, are welcome.

Selected references

  • M. Benaïm, Dynamics of stochastic approximation algorithms, Séminaire de Probabilités XXXIII, Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1709, Springer, 1999, pp. 1–68. https://doi.org/10.1007/BFb0096509
  • M. Benaïm, M. W. Hirsch, Asymptotic pseudotrajectories and chain recurrent flows, with applications, Journal of Dynamics and Differential Equations 8 (1996), 141–176. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02218617
  • M. Benaïm, Vertex-reinforced random walks and a conjecture of Pemantle, Annals of Probability 25 (1997), 361–392. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1024404292
  • M. Duflo, Random Iterative Models, Applications of Mathematics 34, Springer, 1997. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-662-12880-0
  • H. J. Kushner, D. S. Clark, Stochastic Approximation Methods for Constrained and Unconstrained Systems, Springer, 1978. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4684-9352-8
  • C. Conley, Isolated Invariant Sets and the Morse Index, CBMS Regional Conference Series in Mathematics 38, AMS, 1978. https://doi.org/10.1090/cbms/038
11 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchProbabilityStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Dynamics of Stochastic Approximation Algorithms 3: Martingale Noise with Bounded q-th Moments and Summable γ_n^(1+q/2) Satisfies Assumption A1 Almost SurelyResearch Paper

Motivation

A stochastic approximation algorithm is a recursion

xn+1−xn=γn+1(F(xn)+Un+1)x_{n+1}-x_n=\gamma_{n+1}\big(F(x_n)+U_{n+1}\big)xn+1​−xn​=γn+1​(F(xn​)+Un+1​)

in Rd\mathbb R^dRd, where FFF is a vector field, γn\gamma_nγn​ are small step sizes and Un+1U_{n+1}Un+1​ is noise. Such recursions go back to Robbins and Monro's root-finding scheme (Robbins–Monro 1951) and underlie stochastic gradient descent, temporal-difference learning, adaptive control and learning in games. The ODE method studies them by comparing the iterates with the trajectories of x˙=F(x)\dot x=F(x)x˙=F(x).

Benaïm's lecture notes (Benaïm 1999) organize the ODE method in two steps. A deterministic step, Proposition 4.1, shows that whenever the noise satisfies a condition called A1 (and the iterates are bounded, or FFF is Lipschitz and bounded on a neighbourhood of them), the interpolated process is an asymptotic pseudotrajectory of the flow of FFF. A probabilistic step then verifies A1 for concrete noise models. This mission formalizes the first such verification, Proposition 4.2: martingale difference noise with bounded qqq-th moments and step sizes with ∑nγn1+q/2<∞\sum_n\gamma_n^{1+q/2}<\infty∑n​γn1+q/2​<∞. The result is described as a particular case of a general theorem of Métivier and Priouret (1987); the same estimates reappear later in the notes.

Setting

Let {γn}n≥1\{\gamma_n\}_{n\ge1}{γn​}n≥1​ be a deterministic sequence with γn≥0\gamma_n\ge0γn​≥0, ∑nγn=∞\sum_n\gamma_n=\infty∑n​γn​=∞ and γn→0\gamma_n\to0γn​→0 (a step sequence). Put τ0=0\tau_0=0τ0​=0, τn=∑i=1nγi\tau_n=\sum_{i=1}^n\gamma_iτn​=∑i=1n​γi​, and let

m(t)=sup⁡{k≥0: t≥τk}m(t)=\sup\{k\ge0:\ t\ge\tau_k\}m(t)=sup{k≥0: t≥τk​}

be the index of the step that contains time t≥0t\ge0t≥0. For a sequence {Un}n≥1\{U_n\}_{n\ge1}{Un​}n≥1​ define the piecewise constant processes Uˉ(t)=Um(t)+1\bar U(t)=U_{m(t)+1}Uˉ(t)=Um(t)+1​ and γˉ(t)=γm(t)+1\bar\gamma(t)=\gamma_{m(t)+1}γˉ​(t)=γm(t)+1​, so that step n+1n+1n+1 occupies the time interval [τn,τn+1)[\tau_n,\tau_{n+1})[τn​,τn+1​) of length γn+1\gamma_{n+1}γn+1​.

Assumption A1 asks that for every T>0T>0T>0

lim⁡n→∞sup⁡{∥∑i=nk−1γi+1Ui+1∥: k=n+1,…,m(τn+T)}=0,\lim_{n\to\infty}\sup\Big\{\Big\|\sum_{i=n}^{k-1}\gamma_{i+1}U_{i+1}\Big\|:\ k=n+1,\dots,m(\tau_n+T)\Big\}=0,n→∞lim​sup{​i=n∑k−1​γi+1​Ui+1​​: k=n+1,…,m(τn​+T)}=0,

or, in the form the notes call equivalent, lim⁡t→∞Δ(t,T)=0\lim_{t\to\infty}\Delta(t,T)=0limt→∞​Δ(t,T)=0 for every T>0T>0T>0, where

Δ(t,T)=sup⁡0≤h≤T∥∫tt+hUˉ(s) ds∥.\Delta(t,T)=\sup_{0\le h\le T}\Big\|\int_t^{t+h}\bar U(s)\,ds\Big\|.Δ(t,T)=0≤h≤Tsup​​∫tt+h​Uˉ(s)ds​.

Let (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P) be a probability space with a nondecreasing sequence {Fn}\{\mathcal F_n\}{Fn​} of sub-σ\sigmaσ-algebras, and F:Rd→RdF:\mathbb R^d\to\mathbb R^dF:Rd→Rd continuous. A sequence {xn}\{x_n\}{xn​} given by the recursion above is a Robbins–Monro algorithm if γ\gammaγ is deterministic, UnU_nUn​ is Fn\mathcal F_nFn​-measurable, and E(Un+1∣Fn)=0E(U_{n+1}\mid\mathcal F_n)=0E(Un+1​∣Fn​)=0.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 4.2

For a Robbins–Monro algorithm and some real q≥2q\ge2q≥2, if

sup⁡nE(∥Un+1∥q)<∞and∑nγn1+q/2<∞,\sup_nE\big(\|U_{n+1}\|^q\big)<\infty\qquad\text{and}\qquad\sum_n\gamma_n^{1+q/2}<\infty,nsup​E(∥Un+1​∥q)<∞andn∑​γn1+q/2​<∞,

then with probability one the realised noise sequence satisfies A1, in both of its forms, simultaneously for all T>0T>0T>0.

Milestones

  1. Eq. (13), an instance of Burkholder's inequality with a universal constant CqC_qCq​:
E{sup⁡n<k≤m(τn+T)∥∑i=nk−1γi+1Ui+1∥q}≤Cq E{[∑i=nm(τn+T)−1γi+12∥Ui+1∥2]q/2}.E\Big\{\sup_{n<k\le m(\tau_n+T)}\Big\|\sum_{i=n}^{k-1}\gamma_{i+1}U_{i+1}\Big\|^q\Big\}\le C_q\,E\Big\{\Big[\sum_{i=n}^{m(\tau_n+T)-1}\gamma_{i+1}^2\|U_{i+1}\|^2\Big]^{q/2}\Big\}.E{n<k≤m(τn​+T)sup​​i=n∑k−1​γi+1​Ui+1​​q}≤Cq​E{[i=n∑m(τn​+T)−1​γi+12​∥Ui+1​∥2]q/2}.
  1. Inequality (14), for finite families with αi≥0\alpha_i\ge0αi​≥0, u>1u>1u>1, 0<δ<10<\delta<10<δ<1:
(∑i∣αiβi∣)u≤(∑iαiδu/(u−1))u−1∑iαi(1−δ)u∣βi∣u.\Big(\sum_i|\alpha_i\beta_i|\Big)^u\le\Big(\sum_i\alpha_i^{\delta u/(u-1)}\Big)^{u-1}\sum_i\alpha_i^{(1-\delta)u}|\beta_i|^u.(i∑​∣αi​βi​∣)u≤(i∑​αiδu/(u−1)​)u−1i∑​αi(1−δ)u​∣βi​∣u.
  1. Eq. (16): for every T>0T>0T>0 there is C(q,T)C(q,T)C(q,T) with E(Δ(t,T)q)≤C(q,T)∫tt+Tγˉq/2(s) dsE(\Delta(t,T)^q)\le C(q,T)\int_t^{t+T}\bar\gamma^{q/2}(s)\,dsE(Δ(t,T)q)≤C(q,T)∫tt+T​γˉ​q/2(s)ds for all t≥0t\ge0t≥0.
  2. Eq. (17): ∑k≥0E(Δ(kT,T)q)<∞\sum_{k\ge0}E(\Delta(kT,T)^q)<\infty∑k≥0​E(Δ(kT,T)q)<∞ for every T>0T>0T>0.
  3. Block comparison: Δ(t,T)≤2Δ(kT,T)+Δ((k+1)T,T)\Delta(t,T)\le2\Delta(kT,T)+\Delta((k+1)T,T)Δ(t,T)≤2Δ(kT,T)+Δ((k+1)T,T) for kT≤t<(k+1)TkT\le t<(k+1)TkT≤t<(k+1)T.

Significance

Proposition 4.2 is the standard sufficient condition under which the ODE method applies to stochastic gradient-type recursions with martingale noise. With q=2q=2q=2 it covers step sizes with ∑γn2<∞\sum\gamma_n^2<\infty∑γn2​<∞ (for example γn=1/n\gamma_n=1/nγn​=1/n) and noise with bounded variance; larger qqq trades stronger moment assumptions for slower decay of the steps, down to ∑γn1+q/2<∞\sum\gamma_n^{1+q/2}<\infty∑γn1+q/2​<∞. Combined with Proposition 4.1 it shows that the interpolated process of a Robbins–Monro algorithm with bounded iterates is almost surely an asymptotic pseudotrajectory of the flow of FFF; the limit set theorems of the notes then locate the limit points of the algorithm.

The result is proved in the notes and in the cited literature; it has not, to our knowledge, been machine-checked. A formal proof would supply reusable pieces that Mathlib currently lacks, most notably a Burkholder (or Burkholder–Davis–Gundy) inequality for discrete-time vector martingales in LqL^qLq, and the continuous-time bookkeeping of the step processes Uˉ\bar UUˉ, γˉ\bar\gammaγˉ​ and the noise deviation Δ\DeltaΔ, shared by the other missions of this series.

Difficulty

The obvious argument controls each window by Doob's L2L^2L2 maximal inequality and sums over windows. That works for q=2q=2q=2 only. For q>2q>2q>2 the second moment of the window sums is not summable under ∑γn1+q/2<∞\sum\gamma_n^{1+q/2}<\infty∑γn1+q/2​<∞, and one needs an LqL^qLq maximal inequality whose right-hand side is the q/2q/2q/2-th moment of the square function. That inequality, Burkholder's, is not in Mathlib. Converting the square function into the moment bound requires a Hölder-type inequality with tuned exponents, and passing from the discrete sums to Δ(t,T)\Delta(t,T)Δ(t,T) requires handling partial steps at both ends of [t,t+h][t,t+h][t,t+h]. A second subtlety is that A1 quantifies over all T>0T>0T>0: the almost-sure statement must hold on a single event of full probability for every TTT, not on an event that depends on TTT.

Formalization scope

The space is Rd\mathbb R^dRd as EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin d); time is real; qqq is a real number with q≥2q\ge2q≥2, and all powers are real powers of nonnegative quantities. The sequences γ\gammaγ and UUU are indexed by N\mathbb NN, and their values at 000 are unused, as the paper indexes them from 111. The filtration is a Mathlib Filtration ℕ, Un+1U_{n+1}Un+1​ is required to be Fn+1\mathcal F_{n+1}Fn+1​-strongly measurable and integrable, and the martingale difference condition is E(Un+1∣Fn)=0E(U_{n+1}\mid\mathcal F_n)=0E(Un+1​∣Fn​)=0 almost surely. Expectations of nonnegative quantities, the suprema in A1 and Δ\DeltaΔ, and the moment bound are taken in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞], so no default value of a non-integrable expectation or of an empty supremum can make a statement hold vacuously; the supremum over an empty range of kkk is 000.

The following readings are excluded and are not acceptable formalizations: a moment hypothesis that holds vacuously, a conditional expectation hypothesis on non-integrable noise, the conclusion "for each TTT, A1 holds almost surely" in place of "almost surely, A1 holds for all TTT", and qqq fixed to 222 or restricted to integers.

All hypotheses are satisfiable: U=0U=0U=0, x=0x=0x=0, F=0F=0F=0 and γn=1/n\gamma_n=1/nγn​=1/n with q=2q=2q=2 satisfy every one of them.

Contributions welcome: a general Burkholder inequality for discrete-time martingales in finite-dimensional spaces (reusable well beyond this mission), lemmas on the step processes and Δ\DeltaΔ (measurability, local integrability, additivity), and the proofs of the milestones.

Selected references

  • M. Benaïm, Dynamics of Stochastic Approximation Algorithms, Séminaire de Probabilités XXXIII, Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1709, Springer, 1999, pp. 1–68. https://doi.org/10.1007/BFb0096509
  • M. Benaïm and M. W. Hirsch, Asymptotic pseudotrajectories and chain recurrent flows, with applications, Journal of Dynamics and Differential Equations 8 (1996), 141–176. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02218617
  • M. Métivier and P. Priouret, Théorèmes de convergence presque sûre pour une classe d'algorithmes stochastiques à pas décroissant, Probability Theory and Related Fields 74 (1987), 403–428.
  • D. L. Burkholder, Distribution function inequalities for martingales, Annals of Probability 1 (1973), 19–42. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1176997023
  • D. W. Stroock, Probability Theory: An Analytic View, Cambridge University Press, 1993.
  • H. Robbins and S. Monro, A stochastic approximation method, Annals of Mathematical Statistics 22 (1951), 400–407. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177729586
  • H. J. Kushner and G. G. Yin, Stochastic Approximation Algorithms and Applications, Springer, 1997.
10 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Dynamics of Stochastic Approximation Algorithms 5: If V(Λ) Has Empty Interior for a Lyapunov Function V, Every Internally Chain Transitive Set Lies in ΛResearch Paper

Motivation

A stochastic approximation algorithm is a recursion xn+1=xn+γn+1(F(xn)+Un+1)x_{n+1}=x_n+\gamma_{n+1}\big(F(x_n)+U_{n+1}\big)xn+1​=xn​+γn+1​(F(xn​)+Un+1​) with decreasing steps γn\gamma_nγn​ and noise UnU_nUn​. Stochastic gradient descent, the Robbins–Monro procedure, reinforcement-learning updates and learning dynamics in games all have this form. The ODE method compares such a recursion with the deterministic dynamics x˙=F(x)\dot x=F(x)x˙=F(x). Benaïm's lecture notes (Séminaire de Probabilités XXXIII, 1999) do this in two steps. First, the limit set of the interpolated process is internally chain transitive for the semiflow of FFF (Theorem 5.7, the subject of mission 1 of this series). Second, internally chain transitive sets are located using properties of the dynamics alone.

The most common tool in the second step is a Lyapounov function: a function that decreases strictly along every trajectory outside a set Λ\LambdaΛ and is constant on Λ\LambdaΛ. Proposition 6.4 of the notes states exactly when such a function forces every internally chain transitive set into Λ\LambdaΛ. It is the step behind the convergence of stochastic gradient algorithms to critical points (Corollary 6.7) and behind convergence results for learning in potential games.

Timeline.

  • Conley (Isolated Invariant Sets and the Morse Index, CBMS 38, 1978) introduced chain recurrence and the attractor–repeller description of it.
  • Benaïm and Hirsch (J. Dyn. Diff. Eq. 8, 1996) identified limit sets of asymptotic pseudotrajectories with internally chain transitive sets.
  • Benaïm (SIAM J. Control Optim. 34, 1996) developed the dynamical-systems approach to stochastic approximation built on these notions.
  • Bowen (J. Differential Equations 18, 1975) characterized chain transitivity by the absence of proper attractors, the content of Proposition 5.3 of the notes.
  • The 1999 notes state the Lyapounov criterion in the form used here, for semiflows on arbitrary metric spaces.

Setting

Let (M,d)(M,d)(M,d) be a metric space, with no compactness or completeness assumed. A semiflow Φ\PhiΦ on MMM is a continuous map R+×M→M\mathbb R_+\times M\to MR+​×M→M, (t,x)↦Φt(x)(t,x)\mapsto\Phi_t(x)(t,x)↦Φt​(x), with Φ0=Id\Phi_0=\mathrm{Id}Φ0​=Id and Φt+s=Φt∘Φs\Phi_{t+s}=\Phi_t\circ\Phi_sΦt+s​=Φt​∘Φs​.

  • A set AAA is invariant if Φt(A)=A\Phi_t(A)=AΦt​(A)=A for every t≥0t\ge0t≥0. For an invariant Λ\LambdaΛ, the restriction Φ∣Λ\Phi|\LambdaΦ∣Λ is the semiflow Φ\PhiΦ acting on Λ\LambdaΛ.
  • For δ,T>0\delta,T>0δ,T>0, a (δ,T)(\delta,T)(δ,T)-pseudo-orbit from aaa to bbb is a list of points y0,…,yky_0,\dots,y_ky0​,…,yk​ (k≥1k\ge1k≥1) and times t0,…,tk−1≥Tt_0,\dots,t_{k-1}\ge Tt0​,…,tk−1​≥T with d(y0,a)<δd(y_0,a)<\deltad(y0​,a)<δ, d(Φtj(yj),yj+1)<δd(\Phi_{t_j}(y_j),y_{j+1})<\deltad(Φtj​​(yj​),yj+1​)<δ for j<kj<kj<k, and yk=by_k=byk​=b.
  • A set LLL is internally chain transitive if it is nonempty, compact and invariant, and for all a,b∈La,b\in La,b∈L and all δ,T>0\delta,T>0δ,T>0 there is a (δ,T)(\delta,T)(δ,T)-pseudo-orbit of Φ∣L\Phi|LΦ∣L, so with every yi∈Ly_i\in Lyi​∈L, from aaa to bbb.
  • An attractor is a nonempty compact invariant set AAA with a neighbourhood WWW on which dist(Φtx,A)→0\mathrm{dist}(\Phi_t x,A)\to0dist(Φt​x,A)→0 uniformly. Its basin is the set of points xxx with dist(Φtx,A)→0\mathrm{dist}(\Phi_t x,A)\to0dist(Φt​x,A)→0.
  • Let Λ⊂M\Lambda\subset MΛ⊂M be compact and invariant. A continuous V:M→RV:M\to\mathbb RV:M→R is a Lyapounov function for Λ\LambdaΛ if t↦V(Φt(x))t\mapsto V(\Phi_t(x))t↦V(Φt​(x)) is constant for x∈Λx\in\Lambdax∈Λ and strictly decreasing for x∉Λx\notin\Lambdax∈/Λ.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 6.4

Let Λ\LambdaΛ be compact invariant and VVV a Lyapounov function for Λ\LambdaΛ, and assume that V(Λ)V(\Lambda)V(Λ) has empty interior in R\mathbb RR. Then for every internally chain transitive set LLL,

L⊂ΛandV∣L is constant.L\subset\Lambda\qquad\text{and}\qquad V|_L\ \text{is constant}.L⊂ΛandV∣L​ is constant.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 5.2. If UUU is open with compact closure and ΦT(U‾)⊂U\Phi_T(\overline U)\subset UΦT​(U)⊂U for some T>0T>0T>0, there is an attractor A⊂UA\subset UA⊂U whose basin contains U‾\overline UU.
  2. Proposition 5.3. For nonempty Λ\LambdaΛ: internally chain transitive   ⟺  \iff⟺ connected and internally chain recurrent   ⟺  \iff⟺ compact invariant, and Φ∣Λ\Phi|\LambdaΦ∣Λ has no proper attractor.
  3. The claim of the proof of 6.4. For LLL internally chain transitive and v∗=inf⁡LVv^*=\inf_L Vv∗=infL​V: L∩Λ≠∅L\cap\Lambda\ne\emptysetL∩Λ=∅ and v∗=inf⁡L∩ΛVv^*=\inf_{L\cap\Lambda}Vv∗=infL∩Λ​V.
  4. The sublevel step of the proof of 6.4. For every c>v∗c>v^*c>v∗ with c∉V(Λ)c\notin V(\Lambda)c∈/V(Λ), V<cV<cV<c on all of LLL.

Significance

The result. Proposition 6.4 converts a statement about real numbers, that V(Λ)V(\Lambda)V(Λ) has empty interior, into a statement about dynamics: the chain recurrent behaviour of Φ\PhiΦ is confined to Λ\LambdaΛ. With Theorem 5.7 it gives the following. If Φ\PhiΦ has such a Lyapounov function, then the limit set of any precompact asymptotic pseudotrajectory, in particular of a bounded stochastic approximation process, lies in Λ\LambdaΛ, and VVV is constant on it. When Λ\LambdaΛ is the set of equilibria and V(Λ)V(\Lambda)V(Λ) is Lebesgue-null by Sard's theorem, this is the convergence of stochastic gradient algorithms to connected sets of critical points (Corollary 6.7). Remark 6.5 gives a flow on the circle with a strict Lyapounov function, where the circle itself is internally chain transitive. So the empty-interior hypothesis cannot be removed.

Formalizing it. The result is proved, in the notes and in the earlier literature. No machine-checked version of chain recurrence for semiflows on metric spaces, Conley's attractor lemma, or Bowen's characterization of chain transitive sets is known to us. The mission therefore adds the following:

  • a formal definition layer for these notions on Mathlib's Flow;
  • formal proofs of Lemma 5.2 and Proposition 5.3, which are reused across this series (missions 1 and 6);
  • the Lyapounov criterion itself.

Difficulty

The obvious argument does not work. It runs: VVV decreases along trajectories, so along an orbit in LLL the value of VVV must settle on Λ\LambdaΛ. But points of an internally chain transitive set are joined only by pseudo-orbits. At each of the kkk jumps, VVV may increase by an amount that is small but not controlled in number, so monotonicity of VVV along true trajectories says nothing directly about LLL. Remark 6.5 shows that the conclusion is genuinely false without a condition on V(Λ)V(\Lambda)V(Λ). The difficulty is therefore global: pseudo-orbits that climb back up VVV through many small jumps must be excluded using information about the restricted semiflow Φ∣L\Phi|LΦ∣L as a whole, not the monotonicity of VVV along single trajectories. Milestones 1 and 2 are the general facts about chain transitive sets that this requires, and their own proofs involve compactness and uniform-continuity estimates over arbitrarily long pseudo-orbits.

Formalization scope

  • Representation. MMM is any MetricSpace, and the semiflow is Flow ℝ≥0 M.
  • Invariance is equality Φt(A)=A\Phi_t(A)=AΦt​(A)=A for every ttt, not inclusion.
  • Pseudo-orbits have at least one trajectory piece (k≥1k\ge1k≥1), times ≥T\ge T≥T, an exact endpoint, and, in the internal notions, all their points in the set.
  • Nonemptiness. Internally chain transitive and internally chain recurrent sets are nonempty by definition. Accordingly, Proposition 5.3 assumes Λ≠∅\Lambda\neq\emptysetΛ=∅ and Lemma 5.2 assumes U≠∅U\neq\emptysetU=∅.
  • Lyapounov function. The predicate contains the standing assumptions of its definition: Λ\LambdaΛ is compact and invariant, VVV is continuous, V(Φtx)=V(x)V(\Phi_t x)=V(x)V(Φt​x)=V(x) on Λ\LambdaΛ, and t↦V(Φtx)t\mapsto V(\Phi_t x)t↦V(Φt​x) is strictly antitone off Λ\LambdaΛ.
  • Empty interior is interior (V '' Λ) = ∅ in R\mathbb RR, not countability, finiteness or measure zero.
  • Infima are stated with IsGLB, not a real sInf.

The following formalizations are trivializing and are excluded:

  • chains with no jumps, under which every point is chain recurrent;
  • invariance as inclusion;
  • a non-strict decrease condition, under which constant functions are Lyapounov functions and the goal is false;
  • chains of Φ\PhiΦ that leave LLL, a strictly weaker notion;
  • quantifying only over limit sets instead of every internally chain transitive set.

A complete development needs elementary facts about ω-limit sets of points of a compact invariant set: they are nonempty, compact and invariant. It also needs the attractor construction A=⋂t≥0⋃s≥tΦs(U)‾A=\bigcap_{t\ge0}\overline{\bigcup_{s\ge t}\Phi_s(U)}A=⋂t≥0​⋃s≥t​Φs​(U)​ and the open sets {y:x↪δ,Ty}\{y: x\hookrightarrow_{\delta,T}y\}{y:x↪δ,T​y} used in Proposition 5.3. These are reusable for any work on Conley theory. Contributions of any of these lemmas, or of proofs of the milestones in any order, are welcome.

Selected references

  • M. Benaïm, Dynamics of Stochastic Approximation Algorithms, Séminaire de Probabilités XXXIII, Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1709, Springer, 1999, pp. 1–68. https://doi.org/10.1007/BFb0096509
  • M. Benaïm, M. W. Hirsch, Asymptotic pseudotrajectories and chain recurrent flows, with applications, J. Dynam. Differential Equations 8 (1996), 141–176. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02218613
  • M. Benaïm, A dynamical system approach to stochastic approximations, SIAM J. Control Optim. 34 (1996), 437–472. https://doi.org/10.1137/S0363012993253534
  • C. Conley, Isolated Invariant Sets and the Morse Index, CBMS Regional Conference Series in Mathematics 38, AMS, 1978. https://doi.org/10.1090/cbms/038
  • R. Bowen, ω-limit sets for Axiom A diffeomorphisms, J. Differential Equations 18 (1975), 333–339. https://doi.org/10.1016/0022-0396(75)90065-0
9 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Topology·Captain: mikedeng1

Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems XI: The Smale HorseshoeTextbook

Why the horseshoe

The Smale horseshoe is the standard example of a smooth invertible map of the plane with chaotic dynamics. Smale introduced it in the 1960s as the mechanism behind the complicated orbits near a transverse homoclinic point, and it became the basic model of hyperbolic invariant sets (Smale 1967). Its importance for differential equations is the Smale–Birkhoff theorem: whenever the stable and unstable manifolds of a hyperbolic fixed point intersect transversally, some iterate of the map contains a horseshoe. Melnikov's method then turns this into a checkable criterion for chaos in periodically forced planar systems such as Duffing's equation.

This mission formalizes the horseshoe as it is treated in Chapter 13 of G. Teschl, Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems (author's preliminary version of AMS GSM 140, 2012). It takes along the one-dimensional results from §§11.4–11.5 that the chapter's argument reuses: the tent map's Cantor set, the one-sided shift, and the metric on two-sided sequences.

Setting

Fix parameters λ\lambdaλ and μ\muμ and let D=[0,1]2D = [0,1]^2D=[0,1]2. The two horizontal strips

J0=[0,1]×[0,1/μ],J1=[0,1]×[1−1/μ,1]J_0 = [0,1] \times [0, 1/\mu], \qquad J_1 = [0,1] \times [1 - 1/\mu, 1]J0​=[0,1]×[0,1/μ],J1​=[0,1]×[1−1/μ,1]

are mapped by

F(x,y)=(λx,μy) on J0,F(x,y)=(1−λx,μ(1−y)) on J1.F(x,y) = (\lambda x, \mu y) \text{ on } J_0, \qquad F(x,y) = (1 - \lambda x, \mu(1-y)) \text{ on } J_1 .F(x,y)=(λx,μy) on J0​,F(x,y)=(1−λx,μ(1−y)) on J1​.

Each strip is contracted horizontally by λ\lambdaλ and stretched vertically by μ\muμ into a vertical strip crossing DDD. The book specifies FFF only on J0∪J1J_0 \cup J_1J0​∪J1​ and leaves the fold between them to a picture. A horseshoe map here is any F:R2→R2F : \mathbb{R}^2 \to \mathbb{R}^2F:R2→R2 given by these formulas on J0∪J1J_0 \cup J_1J0​∪J1​. On K0=F(J0)=[0,λ]×[0,1]K_0 = F(J_0) = [0, \lambda] \times [0,1]K0​=F(J0​)=[0,λ]×[0,1] and K1=F(J1)=[1−λ,1]×[0,1]K_1 = F(J_1) = [1-\lambda, 1] \times [0,1]K1​=F(J1​)=[1−λ,1]×[0,1] the inverse ggg is given by explicit formulas.

The tent map Tν(x)=ν2(1−∣2x−1∣)T_\nu(x) = \frac{\nu}{2}(1 - |2x-1|)Tν​(x)=2ν​(1−∣2x−1∣) on R\mathbb{R}R has the invariant set

Λ(Tν)={x∈R:Tνn(x)∈[0,1] for all n≥0}.\Lambda(T_\nu) = \{x \in \mathbb{R} : T_\nu^n(x) \in [0,1] \text{ for all } n \ge 0\}.Λ(Tν​)={x∈R:Tνn​(x)∈[0,1] for all n≥0}.

The second coordinate of FFF is Tμ(y)T_\mu(y)Tμ​(y) and the first coordinate of ggg is T1/λ(x)T_{1/\lambda}(x)T1/λ​(x). The horseshoe's invariant set is

Λ=Λ(T1/λ)×Λ(Tμ).\Lambda = \Lambda(T_{1/\lambda}) \times \Lambda(T_\mu).Λ=Λ(T1/λ​)×Λ(Tμ​).

The two-sided shift space is Σ2={0,1}Z\Sigma_2 = \{0,1\}^{\mathbb{Z}}Σ2​={0,1}Z. It carries the metric

d(s,t)=12∑n≥0∣sn−tn∣+∣s−n−t−n∣2nd(s,t) = \tfrac12 \sum_{n \ge 0} \frac{|s_n - t_n| + |s_{-n} - t_{-n}|}{2^n}d(s,t)=21​n≥0∑​2n∣sn​−tn​∣+∣s−n​−t−n​∣​

and the shift σ(s)n=sn+1\sigma(s)_n = s_{n+1}σ(s)n​=sn+1​. The itinerary φ(x,y)∈Σ2\varphi(x,y) \in \Sigma_2φ(x,y)∈Σ2​ of a point of Λ\LambdaΛ records, for n≥0n \ge 0n≥0, which strip JynJ_{y_n}Jyn​​ contains Fn(x,y)F^n(x,y)Fn(x,y). For n<0n < 0n<0 it records which strip Kx−n−1K_{x_{-n-1}}Kx−n−1​​ contains g−n−1(x,y)g^{-n-1}(x,y)g−n−1(x,y).

A system (M,f)(M, f)(M,f) is chaotic in the book's sense (p. 296) under four conditions: fff is continuous, MMM is infinite, fff is topologically transitive (for nonempty open U,VU, VU,V some fn(U)f^n(U)fn(U) meets VVV), and the periodic points are dense. A Cantor set is a compact, perfect, totally disconnected set.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 13.1 (p. 333)

For 0<λ<120 < \lambda < \tfrac120<λ<21​, μ>2\mu > 2μ>2 and every horseshoe map FFF:

Λ is a Cantor set,F(Λ)=Λ,φ:Λ→Σ2 is a homeomorphism with σ∘φ=φ∘F on Λ,\Lambda \text{ is a Cantor set}, \quad F(\Lambda) = \Lambda, \quad \varphi : \Lambda \to \Sigma_2 \text{ is a homeomorphism with } \sigma \circ \varphi = \varphi \circ F \text{ on } \Lambda,Λ is a Cantor set,F(Λ)=Λ,φ:Λ→Σ2​ is a homeomorphism with σ∘φ=φ∘F on Λ, and (Λ,F∣Λ) is chaotic.\text{and } (\Lambda, F|_\Lambda) \text{ is chaotic.}and (Λ,F∣Λ​) is chaotic.

The book's sentence is: "The Smale horseshoe map has an invariant Cantor set Λ\LambdaΛ on which the dynamics is equivalent to the double sided shift on two symbols. In particular it is chaotic."

Milestones, in attack order

  • Lemma 11.15 (p. 306). On two-sided sequences, d(s,t)≤N−nd(s,t) \le N^{-n}d(s,t)≤N−n when s,ts, ts,t agree on ∣j∣≤n|j| \le n∣j∣≤n, and d(s,t)d(s,t)d(s,t) is bounded below by a multiple of N−nN^{-n}N−n when they differ at some ∣j∣≤n|j| \le n∣j∣≤n.
  • Lemma 11.8 (p. 303). The one-sided shift on ΣN={0,…,N−1}N0\Sigma_N = \{0, \dots, N-1\}^{\mathbb{N}_0}ΣN​={0,…,N−1}N0​ has countably many periodic points, and they are dense.
  • Lemma 11.9 (p. 303). The one-sided shift has a dense forward orbit.
  • Lemma 11.4 (p. 299). For ν>2\nu > 2ν>2, Λ(Tν)\Lambda(T_\nu)Λ(Tν​) is a Cantor set.
  • Theorem 11.5 (p. 301). For ν>2\nu > 2ν>2, the itinerary map conjugates (Λ(Tν),Tν)(\Lambda(T_\nu), T_\nu)(Λ(Tν​),Tν​) to the one-sided shift on {0,1}N0\{0,1\}^{\mathbb{N}_0}{0,1}N0​ by a homeomorphism.

Significance

Theorem 13.1 exhibits a two-dimensional invertible system with an explicit invariant set on which the dynamics is exactly the two-sided shift. Every property of the shift is then inherited:

  • infinitely many periodic orbits of every period;
  • a dense orbit;
  • sensitive dependence (Lemma 11.3);
  • orbits with any prescribed forward and backward itinerary.

Theorem 13.1 is the model to which the Smale–Birkhoff theorem (13.2) reduces the dynamics near a transverse homoclinic point. It is therefore the terminal object of the book's route from Melnikov integrals to chaos in forced oscillators.

The results are classical and fully proved in the literature. Their proofs have not been formalized. Mathlib has Cantor-type sets (the middle-thirds set), totally disconnected and perfect sets, and product topologies. It has no tent-map invariant set, no two-sided symbolic dynamics with the book's metric, and no conjugacy theorem of this kind. A formal proof would supply a machine-checked conjugacy between a concrete planar map and a full shift, together with the symbolic-dynamics layer it rests on.

Difficulty

The book's own argument for Theorem 13.1 has two gaps that a formal proof must fill. First, it asserts that a product of two Cantor sets is again a Cantor set and leaves this as an exercise. Second, it treats continuity of the itinerary map and of its inverse as an exercise. It also leans on "all other results hold with no further modifications" to transfer the one-sided lemmas (11.7–11.9) to the two-sided shift.

The two-sided transfer is not literally a restatement. The metric (11.35) weights each off-centre index by 12\tfrac1221​, and so the one-sided closeness estimate does not carry over verbatim; see the correction to Lemma 11.15 below.

The inverse ggg must also be tracked alongside FFF. The negative half of the itinerary is defined through ggg rather than through FFF, so the conjugacy at index −1-1−1 couples the two halves.

Finally, the parameter endpoints need care. The book allows λ=12\lambda = \tfrac12λ=21​ and μ=2\mu = 2μ=2. At μ=2\mu = 2μ=2 the defining formulas are inconsistent on y=12y = \tfrac12y=21​, and at either endpoint one factor of Λ\LambdaΛ is the whole interval [0,1][0,1][0,1].

Formalization scope

  • Parameters. The goal is stated for 0<λ<120 < \lambda < \tfrac120<λ<21​ and μ>2\mu > 2μ>2, a correction of the book's closed endpoints recorded in the statement.
  • Lemma 11.15 is stated with the lower bound 12N−n\tfrac12 N^{-n}21​N−n instead of the printed N−nN^{-n}N−n. The printed bound fails for the metric (11.35): for N=2N = 2N=2, n=1n = 1n=1 and sequences differing only at index 111, d=14d = \tfrac14d=41​. The first clause is as printed.
  • The map. IsHorseshoeMap λ μ F is a predicate fixing FFF only on J0∪J1J_0 \cup J_1J0​∪J1​, and the goal quantifies over all such FFF. Its conclusion therefore cannot depend on how the fold is drawn. The inverse horseshoeInv is the explicit formula (13.5)–(13.6).
  • Spaces. R2\mathbb{R}^2R2 is ℝ × ℝ; its max-distance has the Euclidean topology. Sequence spaces are ℕ → Fin N and ℤ → Fin N. The metrics (11.28) and (11.35) are functions symDist and symDistZ, not type-class instances. Density and continuity are stated in ε\varepsilonε–δ\deltaδ form against them, so no unmentioned product topology enters.
  • Topological equivalence is spelled out: FFF maps Λ\LambdaΛ onto Λ\LambdaΛ, φ\varphiφ is a bijection Λ→Σ2\Lambda \to \Sigma_2Λ→Σ2​, σ∘φ=φ∘F\sigma \circ \varphi = \varphi \circ Fσ∘φ=φ∘F on Λ\LambdaΛ, and φ\varphiφ, φ−1\varphi^{-1}φ−1 are continuous.
  • Chaos is the book's definition (continuous, infinite, transitive, dense periodic points), applied to FFF restricted to the subtype Λ\LambdaΛ. It is not the three-axiom definition with sensitive dependence.
  • Cantor set means compact, Preperfect and IsTotallySeparated, the last being the book's definition of total disconnectedness on p. 302.

Λ\LambdaΛ is constructed as in (13.8) and φ\varphiφ as in (13.9), not quantified over. The goal asserts the full conjunction, so it cannot be discharged by exhibiting some other invariant set or some other conjugacy. For μ>2\mu > 2μ>2 maps satisfying IsHorseshoeMap exist, so the hypothesis is not vacuous.

A complete development needs:

  • the product of Cantor sets in a product of metric spaces;
  • the tent-map coding (Theorem 11.5) for both TμT_\muTμ​ and T1/λT_{1/\lambda}T1/λ​;
  • the two-sided shift's Cantor, periodic-point and transitivity properties;
  • transport of chaos along a conjugacy.

The tent-map and one-sided shift lemmas duplicate those of the interval-maps mission of this series and are reusable there. Contributions proving the two-sided analogues of Lemmas 11.7–11.9 as auxiliary lemmas are welcome.

Selected references

  • G. Teschl, Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems, Graduate Studies in Mathematics 140, AMS, 2012. Author's preliminary version: https://www.mat.univie.ac.at/~gerald/ftp/book-ode/ode.pdf
  • S. Smale, Differentiable dynamical systems, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 73 (1967), 747–817. https://doi.org/10.1090/S0002-9904-1967-11798-1
  • R. L. Devaney, An Introduction to Chaotic Dynamical Systems, 2nd ed., Addison-Wesley, 1989.
  • C. Robinson, Dynamical Systems: Stability, Symbolic Dynamics, and Chaos, 2nd ed., CRC Press, 1999.
20 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Analysis·Captain: mikedeng1

Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems X: Periodic Orbits and the Poincaré MapTextbook

Motivation

Periodic solutions are the simplest non-stationary long-time behaviour of an autonomous system x˙=f(x)\dot x = f(x)x˙=f(x): limit cycles in oscillators and population models, closed orbits of conservative systems. The first question about a periodic orbit is whether it is stable. Poincaré introduced the first-return map on a transversal section, which turns this question into a question about a fixed point of a map in one dimension less. Floquet theory attacks the same question through the linear periodic system obtained by linearizing along the orbit. This mission formalizes Chapter 12, §§12.1–12.2 of G. Teschl, Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems (AMS Graduate Studies in Mathematics 140, 2012; author's preliminary version, DOI of the published book). That chapter proves the two approaches agree and derives the standard stability and persistence criteria from this.

Setting

Let M⊆RnM \subseteq \mathbb{R}^nM⊆Rn be open, f∈Ck(M,Rn)f \in C^k(M, \mathbb{R}^n)f∈Ck(M,Rn) with k≥1k \ge 1k≥1, and let Φ(t,x)\Phi(t, x)Φ(t,x) be the flow of x˙=f(x)\dot x = f(x)x˙=f(x) with maximal intervals IxI_xIx​: t↦Φ(t,x)t \mapsto \Phi(t,x)t↦Φ(t,x) is the unique maximal solution with Φ(0,x)=x\Phi(0,x) = xΦ(0,x)=x. A point x0∈Mx_0 \in Mx0​∈M is periodic with period T>0T > 0T>0 if Φ(T,x0)=x0\Phi(T, x_0) = x_0Φ(T,x0​)=x0​ and Φ(t,x0)≠x0\Phi(t, x_0) \neq x_0Φ(t,x0​)=x0​ for 0<t<T0 < t < T0<t<T. Its orbit γ(x0)={Φ(t,x0)}\gamma(x_0) = \{\Phi(t, x_0)\}γ(x0​)={Φ(t,x0​)} is then a closed curve.

Linearization along the orbit. Put A(t)=dfΦ(t,x0)A(t) = df_{\Phi(t, x_0)}A(t)=dfΦ(t,x0​)​, a TTT-periodic matrix. The first variational equation is y˙=A(t)y\dot y = A(t) yy˙​=A(t)y, and Πx0(t,t0)\Pi_{x_0}(t, t_0)Πx0​​(t,t0​) denotes its principal matrix solution: ∂tΠ=A(t)Π\partial_t \Pi = A(t)\Pi∂t​Π=A(t)Π, Π(t0,t0)=I\Pi(t_0, t_0) = \mathbb{I}Π(t0​,t0​)=I. The monodromy matrix based at Φ(t0,x0)\Phi(t_0,x_0)Φ(t0​,x0​) is

Mx0(t0)=∂ΦT∂x(Φ(t0,x0)).M_{x_0}(t_0) = \frac{\partial \Phi_T}{\partial x}\big(\Phi(t_0, x_0)\big).Mx0​​(t0​)=∂x∂ΦT​​(Φ(t0​,x0​)).

The Poincaré map. A transversal section is Σ={x∈U∣S(x)=0}\Sigma = \{x \in U \mid S(x) = 0\}Σ={x∈U∣S(x)=0} with UUU open, S∈Ck(U)S \in C^k(U)S∈Ck(U), ∂S/∂x≠0\partial S/\partial x \ne 0∂S/∂x=0 and (∂S/∂x) f≠0(\partial S/\partial x)\, f \neq 0(∂S/∂x)f=0 on Σ\SigmaΣ. If x0∈Σx_0 \in \Sigmax0​∈Σ there is a CkC^kCk return time τ\tauτ near x0x_0x0​ with τ(x0)=T\tau(x_0) = Tτ(x0​)=T and Φ(τ(y),y)∈Σ\Phi(\tau(y), y) \in \SigmaΦ(τ(y),y)∈Σ. The Poincaré map is

PΣ(y)=Φ(τ(y),y).P_\Sigma(y) = \Phi(\tau(y), y).PΣ​(y)=Φ(τ(y),y).

Its derivative dPΣ(x0)dP_\Sigma(x_0)dPΣ​(x0​) is a linear map of the (n−1)(n-1)(n−1)-dimensional tangent space Tx0Σ=ker⁡∂S∂x(x0)T_{x_0}\Sigma = \ker \frac{\partial S}{\partial x}(x_0)Tx0​​Σ=ker∂x∂S​(x0​) into itself.

Stability. The orbit γ\gammaγ is stable if every neighborhood UUU of γ\gammaγ contains a neighborhood VVV of γ\gammaγ from which solutions stay in UUU for all t≥0t \ge 0t≥0. It is asymptotically stable if moreover d(Φ(t,x),γ)→0d(\Phi(t,x), \gamma) \to 0d(Φ(t,x),γ)→0 for all xxx in some neighborhood of γ\gammaγ. A periodic orbit is hyperbolic if dPΣ(x0)dP_\Sigma(x_0)dPΣ​(x0​) has no eigenvalue on the unit circle.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 12.4

For every t0∈Rt_0 \in \mathbb{R}t0​∈R,

χMx0(t0)(X)=(X−1) χdPΣ(x0)(X),\chi_{M_{x_0}(t_0)}(X) = (X - 1)\,\chi_{dP_\Sigma(x_0)}(X),χMx0​​(t0​)​(X)=(X−1)χdPΣ​(x0​)​(X),

where χ\chiχ is the characteristic polynomial. So the eigenvalues of dPΣ(x0)dP_\Sigma(x_0)dPΣ​(x0​) together with the single value 111 are exactly the eigenvalues of the monodromy matrix, with multiplicities. In particular they depend neither on the section Σ\SigmaΣ nor on the base point on the orbit.

Milestones

  • Lemma 12.1. Πx0(t,t0)=∂Φt−t0∂x(Φ(t0,x0))\Pi_{x_0}(t,t_0) = \frac{\partial\Phi_{t-t_0}}{\partial x}(\Phi(t_0,x_0))Πx0​​(t,t0​)=∂x∂Φt−t0​​​(Φ(t0​,x0​)), and f(Φ(t,x0))=Πx0(t,t0)f(Φ(t0,x0))f(\Phi(t,x_0)) = \Pi_{x_0}(t,t_0) f(\Phi(t_0,x_0))f(Φ(t,x0​))=Πx0​​(t,t0​)f(Φ(t0​,x0​)).
  • Corollary 12.3. If every eigenvalue of dPΣ(x0)dP_\Sigma(x_0)dPΣ​(x0​) has modulus <1< 1<1, then γ(x0)\gamma(x_0)γ(x0​) is asymptotically stable.
  • Corollary 12.5. det⁡dPΣ(x0)=det⁡Mx0(t0)≠0\det dP_\Sigma(x_0) = \det M_{x_0}(t_0) \neq 0detdPΣ​(x0​)=detMx0​​(t0​)=0, and PΣP_\SigmaPΣ​ is a local CkC^kCk diffeomorphism of Σ\SigmaΣ at x0x_0x0​.
  • Lemma 12.6. For n=2n = 2n=2, γ(x0)\gamma(x_0)γ(x0​) is asymptotically stable if ∫0Tdiv⁡f(Φ(t,x0)) dt<0\int_0^T \operatorname{div} f(\Phi(t,x_0))\,dt < 0∫0T​divf(Φ(t,x0​))dt<0 and unstable if the integral is positive.
  • Lemma 12.7. If f(x,0)f(x,0)f(x,0) has a hyperbolic periodic orbit through x0x_0x0​ and f(x,μ)f(x,\mu)f(x,μ) is CkC^kCk, then on a neighborhood of μ=0\mu = 0μ=0 there is a CkC^kCk family x0(μ)x_0(\mu)x0​(μ) with x0(0)=x0x_0(0) = x_0x0​(0)=x0​ and each x0(μ)x_0(\mu)x0​(μ) periodic for f(⋅,μ)f(\cdot,\mu)f(⋅,μ).

Significance

The result. Theorem 12.4 is the bridge between the two standard tools for periodic orbits. The Floquet multipliers of y˙=A(t)y\dot y = A(t)yy˙​=A(t)y can often be computed or estimated, for instance through Liouville's formula det⁡Mx0(t0)=exp⁡∫0Tdiv⁡f(Φ(t,x0)) dt\det M_{x_0}(t_0) = \exp\int_0^T \operatorname{div} f(\Phi(t,x_0))\,dtdetMx0​​(t0​)=exp∫0T​divf(Φ(t,x0​))dt. The Poincaré map is where the dynamics is decided, for instance through the fixed-point stability theory of maps. Corollaries 12.3 and 12.5 and Lemma 12.6 are the resulting stability tests. Lemma 12.7 is the structural-stability statement for hyperbolic orbits that bifurcation theory starts from. Theorems 12.8–12.10 (stable manifolds of periodic orbits) build on the same objects.

Formalizing it. All results are classical and proved in the book. None has a machine-checked proof on the platform or, as far as is known, in Mathlib, which has neither Poincaré maps nor the linearization of flows along orbits. The work is a formalization of the known proofs. It needs differentiability of the flow with respect to initial conditions, and that part is reusable across the whole of qualitative ODE theory.

Difficulty

The algebra of Theorem 12.4 is short. The two linear maps act on different spaces: Mx0(0)M_{x_0}(0)Mx0​​(0) on Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn, and dPΣ(x0)dP_\Sigma(x_0)dPΣ​(x0​) on the hyperplane Tx0ΣT_{x_0}\SigmaTx0​​Σ. That hyperplane is in general not orthogonal to f(x0)f(x_0)f(x0​), not a coordinate hyperplane, and not invariant under Mx0(0)M_{x_0}(0)Mx0​​(0). Any comparison has to go through the derivative of y↦Φ(τ(y),y)y \mapsto \Phi(\tau(y), y)y↦Φ(τ(y),y), which involves the derivative of the implicitly defined return time. Behind all this sits the differentiability of Φ\PhiΦ in xxx and the variational equation it satisfies, which Mathlib does not provide for local flows. For the stability milestones, the delicate step is passing from the discrete iterates of PΣP_\SigmaPΣ​ on Σ\SigmaΣ back to the continuous flow near the whole orbit. That requires uniform control over one period.

Formalization scope

The state space is Fin n → ℝ. Norm-dependent notions (distance to the orbit, neighborhoods) do not depend on the choice of norm. The flow is local: IsMaximalFlow f M I Φ characterizes Φ\PhiΦ and IxI_xIx​ by maximality and uniqueness, and Φ\PhiΦ's values outside its domain are never used. Derivatives are Mathlib's fderiv. The section Σ\SigmaΣ is the book's general {S=0}\{S = 0\}{S=0} with (∂S/∂x)f≠0(\partial S/\partial x)f \neq 0(∂S/∂x)f=0, not a hyperplane chosen orthogonal to f(x0)f(x_0)f(x0​). The return time τ\tauτ is any CkC^kCk function on a neighborhood of x0x_0x0​ with τ(x0)=T\tau(x_0) = Tτ(x0​)=T and Φ(τ(y),y)∈Σ\Phi(\tau(y),y) \in \SigmaΦ(τ(y),y)∈Σ; such a function agrees with the book's τ\tauτ near x0x_0x0​. dPΣ(x0)dP_\Sigma(x_0)dPΣ​(x0​) is an endomorphism L of LinearMap.ker (fderiv ℝ S x₀) that agrees with the derivative of y↦Φ(τ(y),y)y \mapsto \Phi(\tau(y), y)y↦Φ(τ(y),y) there (IsPoincareDerivative). Theorems 12.4 and 12.5 assert that it exists. Eigenvalues are complex roots of characteristic polynomials.

Conventions and readings:

  • The goal compares characteristic polynomials, so multiplicities count. Equality of eigenvalue sets, a statement at a single convenient t0t_0t0​, or a hyperplane section would each be weaker than the book's theorem and do not count as solving the goal.
  • The monodromy matrix is ∂ΦT∂x(Φ(t0,x0))\frac{\partial\Phi_T}{\partial x}(\Phi(t_0,x_0))∂x∂ΦT​​(Φ(t0​,x0​)). The book prints ΦT−t0\Phi_{T-t_0}ΦT−t0​​ on p. 316, a typo inconsistent with (12.5) and (12.8).
  • "Periodic orbit" means positive least period. Fixed points are excluded, since there is no transversal section through them. In dimension n≤1n \le 1n≤1 no such orbit exists, and the statements are vacuous there as in the book.
  • "Hyperbolic periodic orbit" is not defined in the preliminary version. The definition used is the one the proof of Lemma 12.7 uses: no eigenvalue of dPΣ(x0)dP_\Sigma(x_0)dPΣ​(x0​) on the unit circle, for some transversal section.
  • Lemma 12.7: "in a sufficiently small neighborhood of 000" is read as: there exists an open W∋0W \ni 0W∋0 inside the parameter set on which x0(⋅)x_0(\cdot)x0​(⋅) is CkC^kCk. The parameter lies in Rp\mathbb{R}^pRp.
  • Corollary 12.5: "local diffeomorphism at x0x_0x0​" is read as: PΣP_\SigmaPΣ​ maps W∩ΣW \cap \SigmaW∩Σ bijectively onto W′∩ΣW' \cap \SigmaW′∩Σ for open W,W′∋x0W, W' \ni x_0W,W′∋x0​, with an inverse that is the restriction of a CkC^kCk map on W′W'W′.
  • (12.1) is stated for all xxx in a neighborhood of the orbit. The book writes U(x0)U(x_0)U(x0​) right after introducing U(γ(x0))U(\gamma(x_0))U(γ(x0​)).

Needed infrastructure: existence, uniqueness and CkC^kCk dependence on initial conditions for local flows; the implicit function theorem (Mathlib); characteristic polynomials and determinants of endomorphisms of finite-dimensional subspaces (Mathlib); Liouville's formula; stability of fixed points of C1C^1C1 maps with contracting linearization. Contributions of any of these as standalone lemmas are welcome.

Selected references

  • G. Teschl, Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems, Graduate Studies in Mathematics 140, AMS, 2012. https://doi.org/10.1090/gsm/140 (preliminary version: https://www.mat.univie.ac.at/~gerald/ftp/book-ode/ode.pdf)
  • H. Poincaré, Mémoire sur les courbes définies par une équation différentielle, J. Math. Pures Appl. (3) 7 (1881) 375–422. http://www.numdam.org/item/JMPA_1881_3_7__375_0/
  • G. Floquet, Sur les équations différentielles linéaires à coefficients périodiques, Ann. Sci. ÉNS (2) 12 (1883) 47–88. https://doi.org/10.24033/asens.220
  • P. Hartman, Ordinary Differential Equations, 2nd ed., SIAM Classics in Applied Mathematics 38, 2002. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9780898719222
22 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Analysis·Captain: mikedeng1

Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems IX: Interval Maps, Symbolic Dynamics and the Tent-Map RepellorTextbook

Motivation

One-dimensional maps are the smallest systems in which deterministic dynamics becomes unpredictable. Chapter 11 of Gerald Teschl's graduate text Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems (author's version; AMS Graduate Studies in Mathematics 140, 2012, doi:10.1090/gsm/140) uses them to make the word "chaos" precise. The chapter proves that a period-three orbit of a continuous interval map forces orbits of every period (Li and Yorke, 1975, the first case of Sarkovskii's theorem), adopts Devaney's topological definition of chaos, codes the tent map by sequences of two symbols, and ends by computing the Hausdorff dimension of the tent map's invariant Cantor set. The same pattern (a Cantor set, a conjugacy to a shift, a fractal dimension) returns in the Smale horseshoe of Chapter 13 and in hyperbolic dynamics generally, so the chapter is the standard entry point to symbolic dynamics.

Setting

For a real parameter μ\muμ the tent map is Tμ(x)=μ2(1−∣2x−1∣)T_\mu(x) = \frac{\mu}{2}(1 - |2x-1|)Tμ​(x)=2μ​(1−∣2x−1∣), a map of the real line. For μ>2\mu > 2μ>2 the peak μ/2\mu/2μ/2 exceeds 111, points leave [0,1][0,1][0,1] and then escape to −∞-\infty−∞. The repellor of the tent map is the set of points that never leave,

Λ={ x∈R:Tμn(x)∈[0,1] for all n≥0 },\Lambda = \{\, x \in \mathbb{R} : T_\mu^n(x) \in [0,1] \text{ for all } n \ge 0 \,\},Λ={x∈R:Tμn​(x)∈[0,1] for all n≥0},

which the book builds as a nested intersection of 2n2^n2n intervals of length μ−n\mu^{-n}μ−n; for μ=2\mu = 2μ=2 it is all of [0,1][0,1][0,1]. With I0=[0,μ−1]I_0 = [0, \mu^{-1}]I0​=[0,μ−1] and I1=[1−μ−1,1]I_1 = [1-\mu^{-1}, 1]I1​=[1−μ−1,1], the itinerary map φ\varphiφ sends x∈Λx \in \Lambdax∈Λ to the sequence (xn)n≥0(x_n)_{n \ge 0}(xn​)n≥0​ with xn=jx_n = jxn​=j when Tμn(x)∈IjT_\mu^n(x) \in I_jTμn​(x)∈Ij​.

The sequence space ΣN={0,…,N−1}N0\Sigma_N = \{0, \dots, N-1\}^{\mathbb{N}_0}ΣN​={0,…,N−1}N0​, N≥2N \ge 2N≥2, carries the metric d(x,y)=∑n≥0∣xn−yn∣/Nnd(x,y) = \sum_{n \ge 0} |x_n - y_n| / N^nd(x,y)=∑n≥0​∣xn​−yn​∣/Nn and the shift σ(x0,x1,… )=(x1,x2,… )\sigma(x_0, x_1, \dots) = (x_1, x_2, \dots)σ(x0​,x1​,…)=(x1​,x2​,…).

A continuous map f:M→Mf : M \to Mf:M→M of a metric space is topologically transitive if for all nonempty open U,VU, VU,V some iterate fn(U)f^n(U)fn(U), n≥1n \ge 1n≥1, meets VVV. It is chaotic if in addition MMM is infinite and the periodic points of fff are dense. This is the definition used in the book, and it has no sensitivity clause. It has sensitive dependence on initial conditions if some δ>0\delta > 0δ>0 has the property that every xxx has points yyy arbitrarily close to it with d(fn(x),fn(y))>δd(f^n(x), f^n(y)) > \deltad(fn(x),fn(y))>δ for some n≥1n \ge 1n≥1. A compact set Λ\LambdaΛ with f(Λ)=Λf(\Lambda) = \Lambdaf(Λ)=Λ is repelling if some neighborhood UUU of Λ\LambdaΛ is eventually left by every orbit starting in U∖ΛU \setminus \LambdaU∖Λ. A repelling set is a repellor if (Λ,f∣Λ)(\Lambda, f|_\Lambda)(Λ,f∣Λ​) is transitive. It is a strange repellor if moreover (Λ,f∣Λ)(\Lambda, f|_\Lambda)(Λ,f∣Λ​) is chaotic and Λ\LambdaΛ is fractal, meaning its Hausdorff dimension dim⁡H\dim_HdimH​ is not an integer. A Cantor set is a compact, totally disconnected, perfect set.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 11.20

dim⁡H(Λ)=log⁡2log⁡μ(μ≥2),and for μ>2, Λ is a strange repellor of Tμ.\dim_H(\Lambda) = \frac{\log 2}{\log \mu} \quad (\mu \ge 2), \qquad \text{and for } \mu > 2,\ \Lambda \text{ is a strange repellor of } T_\mu .dimH​(Λ)=logμlog2​(μ≥2),and for μ>2, Λ is a strange repellor of Tμ​.

The book states the strange-repellor clause for μ≥2\mu \ge 2μ≥2. At μ=2\mu = 2μ=2, however, Λ=[0,1]\Lambda = [0,1]Λ=[0,1] has dimension 111, which is an integer, so the goal restricts that clause to μ>2\mu > 2μ>2.

Milestones

  • Lemma 11.1. A continuous f:[a,b]→[a,b]f : [a,b] \to [a,b]f:[a,b]→[a,b] with a point of prime period 333 has points of every prime period n≥1n \ge 1n≥1.
  • Lemma 11.3. A chaotic map has sensitive dependence on initial conditions.
  • Lemma 11.6. On ΣN\Sigma_NΣN​: d(x,y)≤N−nd(x,y) \le N^{-n}d(x,y)≤N−n if xj=yjx_j = y_jxj​=yj​ for all j≤nj \le nj≤n, and d(x,y)≥N−nd(x,y) \ge N^{-n}d(x,y)≥N−n if xj≠yjx_j \ne y_jxj​=yj​ for some j≤nj \le nj≤n.
  • Lemma 11.8. The periodic points of σ\sigmaσ on ΣN\Sigma_NΣN​ are countable and dense.
  • Lemma 11.9. The shift on ΣN\Sigma_NΣN​ has a dense forward orbit.
  • Lemma 11.4. For μ>2\mu > 2μ>2, Λ\LambdaΛ is a Cantor set.
  • Theorem 11.5. For μ>2\mu > 2μ>2, φ\varphiφ is a homeomorphism of Λ\LambdaΛ onto Σ2\Sigma_2Σ2​ with σ∘φ=φ∘Tμ\sigma \circ \varphi = \varphi \circ T_\muσ∘φ=φ∘Tμ​ on Λ\LambdaΛ.

Significance

The dimension formula is the simplest non-trivial instance of the principle that the Hausdorff dimension of an expanding repellor is determined by the number of branches and the expansion rate. For conformal repellors this principle becomes Bowen's formula. Theorem 11.23 of the same chapter extends the bound to general two-branch expanding interval maps, with log⁡2/log⁡β≤dim⁡HΛ≤log⁡2/log⁡α\log 2/\log\beta \le \dim_H \Lambda \le \log 2/\log\alphalog2/logβ≤dimH​Λ≤log2/logα. The conjugacy with the full shift is the device that reduces the dynamics on Λ\LambdaΛ to combinatorics of sequences. It is reused verbatim for the horseshoe.

On formalization: Mathlib has Hausdorff measure and dimension (MeasureTheory.Measure.hausdorffMeasure, dimH) together with Hölder and Lipschitz image bounds. It has no dimension computation for a self-similar Cantor set and no symbolic-dynamics layer. On Prove2Me, the Devaney series proves period three implies all periods and Sarkovskii's theorem for continuous maps R→R\mathbb{R} \to \mathbb{R}R→R, the density of periodic points and a dense orbit for the two-symbol shift, and a Cantor-set statement for the quadratic family. None of these states the results for self-maps of a compact interval, for NNN symbols, or for the tent map, and none computes a Hausdorff dimension. All results here are proved in the book, except that the proof of Theorem 11.20 is terse. None is formalized in the form stated here.

Difficulty

The upper bound dim⁡HΛ≤log⁡2/log⁡μ\dim_H \Lambda \le \log 2/\log\mudimH​Λ≤log2/logμ comes from the natural covers. The lower bound is the hard direction: it has to hold for every cover, including covers by sets of very different sizes that do not line up with the 2n2^n2n construction intervals. So the natural covers alone do not decide it. Counting the construction intervals that an arbitrary set of a given diameter can meet needs the gaps between them to be controlled uniformly. The heuristic self-similarity identity hα(Λ)=2μ−αhα(Λ)h^\alpha(\Lambda) = 2\mu^{-\alpha} h^\alpha(\Lambda)hα(Λ)=2μ−αhα(Λ) fixes α\alphaα only once 0<hα(Λ)<∞0 < h^\alpha(\Lambda) < \infty0<hα(Λ)<∞ is known, and that is exactly what has to be proved. For the strange-repellor clause, every part of the definition (repelling, transitive, infinite, dense periodic points, fractal) has to be checked for (Λ,Tμ∣Λ)(\Lambda, T_\mu|_\Lambda)(Λ,Tμ​∣Λ​) with the subspace topology. Transferring transitivity and density of periodic points from Σ2\Sigma_2Σ2​ requires the homeomorphism of Theorem 11.5 in both directions, not just a continuous surjection. In Lemma 11.1 the difficulty is showing that the periodic point found has prime period nnn, not a divisor of nnn.

Formalization scope

Everything is stated in namespace TeschlODE.IntervalMaps against Mathlib.

  • The tent map is a total function R→R\mathbb{R} \to \mathbb{R}R→R, and Λ\LambdaΛ is defined as the set of points whose orbit stays in [0,1][0,1][0,1], uniformly in μ\muμ. For μ>2\mu > 2μ>2 this is the book's ⋂nΛn\bigcap_n \Lambda_n⋂n​Λn​ (11.18).
  • ΣN\Sigma_NΣN​ is ℕ → Fin N, and the metric (11.28) is a function symDist N (a tsum, summable for N≥2N \ge 2N≥2). Density and continuity on ΣN\Sigma_NΣN​ are stated in explicit ε\varepsilonε–δ\deltaδ form with this function. Each theorem assumes N≥2N \ge 2N≥2, the book's N∈N∖{1}N \in \mathbb{N}\setminus\{1\}N∈N∖{1}.
  • The itinerary map is ℝ → (ℕ → Fin 2). Its values off Λ\LambdaΛ are meaningless and never used. "Homeomorphism" in Theorem 11.5 means: φ\varphiφ is a bijection of Λ\LambdaΛ onto Σ2\Sigma_2Σ2​, it is continuous on Λ\LambdaΛ, and its inverse is continuous, all in metric form.
  • Chaos, transitivity, repelling sets, repellors and strange repellors are predicates on a map of a metric space. The restricted system (Λ,f∣Λ)(\Lambda, f|_\Lambda)(Λ,f∣Λ​) uses the subspace topology. Transitivity quantifies over nonempty open sets and iterates n≥1n \ge 1n≥1. Periodic points are Function.periodicPts, and the prime period in Lemma 11.1 is Function.minimalPeriod on the subtype [a,b][a,b][a,b].
  • dim⁡H\dim_HdimH​ is Mathlib's dimH, valued in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]. "Not an integer" means finite and different from every natural number. The goal's right-hand side is ENNReal.ofReal (log 2 / log μ).

There are no "sufficiently small" or O(⋅)O(\cdot)O(⋅) readings in this chapter. The only quantifier choices are the explicit ε\varepsilonε–δ\deltaδ forms above and the nonempty open sets in transitivity.

The goal is not a dimension-only statement. For μ>2\mu > 2μ>2, a statement that proved only (11.49), or that restricted to a single value such as μ=3\mu = 3μ=3, would be a different and weaker theorem. The full strange-repellor conclusion, with every clause of the definition, is required. Solvers can reuse the symbolic-dynamics lemmas (11.6, 11.8, 11.9) and the conjugacy (11.5). General Mathlib contributions on ΣN\Sigma_NΣN​ as a metric space are welcome.

Selected references

  • G. Teschl, Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems, AMS Graduate Studies in Mathematics 140, 2012. Author's version: https://www.mat.univie.ac.at/~gerald/ftp/book-ode/ode.pdf ; https://doi.org/10.1090/gsm/140
  • R. L. Devaney, An Introduction to Chaotic Dynamical Systems, 2nd ed., Addison-Wesley, 1989 (book; no DOI).
  • T.-Y. Li and J. A. Yorke, "Period three implies chaos", American Mathematical Monthly 82 (1975), 985–992. https://doi.org/10.2307/2318254
  • K. Falconer, Fractal Geometry: Mathematical Foundations and Applications, Wiley, 1990 (book; no DOI for the first edition).
  • C. Robinson, Dynamical Systems: Stability, Symbolic Dynamics, and Chaos, 2nd ed., CRC Press, 1999 (book).
21 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Analysis·Captain: mikedeng1

Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems VI: The Poincaré–Bendixson TheoremTextbook

Motivation

Long-time behaviour is the central question about an autonomous differential equation x˙=f(x)\dot x = f(x)x˙=f(x): where does a trajectory go as t→±∞t \to \pm\inftyt→±∞? In the plane this question has an almost complete answer. The theory begun by Poincaré (Mémoire sur les courbes définies par une équation différentielle, 1881–1886) and completed by Bendixson (Sur les courbes définies par des équations différentielles, Acta Math. 24, 1901, doi:10.1007/BF02403068) shows that a bounded planar trajectory can only accumulate on equilibria, on a periodic orbit, or on a chain of equilibria joined by connecting orbits. Chaotic behaviour, which already occurs for three-dimensional flows such as the Lorenz system, is excluded. It is the standard tool for proving that a planar system has a limit cycle, and it underlies Hilbert's 16th problem.

This mission formalizes Section 7.3 of G. Teschl, Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems (author's preliminary version of AMS Graduate Studies in Mathematics 140, 2012), pp. 220–224, which proves the classical theorem and the generalized version with finitely many fixed points.

Setting

Let M⊆R2M \subseteq \mathbb{R}^2M⊆R2 be open and f∈C1(M,R2)f \in C^1(M, \mathbb{R}^2)f∈C1(M,R2). An integral curve at xxx is a function φ\varphiφ on an open interval J∋0J \ni 0J∋0 with φ(0)=x\varphi(0) = xφ(0)=x, φ(J)⊆M\varphi(J) \subseteq Mφ(J)⊆M and φ˙(s)=f(φ(s))\dot\varphi(s) = f(\varphi(s))φ˙​(s)=f(φ(s)) on JJJ. The union of all such JJJ is the maximal interval Ix=(T−(x),T+(x))I_x = (T_-(x), T_+(x))Ix​=(T−​(x),T+​(x)). The flow Φ(t,x)\Phi(t, x)Φ(t,x), t∈Ixt \in I_xt∈Ix​, is the value at time ttt of the maximal integral curve at xxx. With σ∈{+,−}\sigma \in \{+,-\}σ∈{+,−}:

  • the orbit is γ(x)={Φ(t,x):t∈Ix}\gamma(x) = \{\Phi(t,x) : t \in I_x\}γ(x)={Φ(t,x):t∈Ix​}, and the half-orbit γσ(x)\gamma_\sigma(x)γσ​(x) keeps only t∈Ixt \in I_xt∈Ix​ with σt>0\sigma t > 0σt>0;
  • a fixed point is a point with f(x)=0f(x) = 0f(x)=0; a periodic point is a point with Φ(T,x)=x\Phi(T, x) = xΦ(T,x)=x for some T>0T > 0T>0 in IxI_xIx​ (fixed points included). A regular periodic orbit is the orbit of a periodic point that is not fixed, and a non-closed orbit is the orbit of a point that is not periodic;
  • the ωσ\omega_\sigmaωσ​-limit set ωσ(x)\omega_\sigma(x)ωσ​(x) is the set of y∈My \in My∈M with Φ(tk,x)→y\Phi(t_k, x) \to yΦ(tk​,x)→y for some times tk∈Ixt_k \in I_xtk​∈Ix​, tk→σ∞t_k \to \sigma\inftytk​→σ∞;
  • a set U⊆MU \subseteq MU⊆M is σ\sigmaσ invariant if γσ(x)⊆U\gamma_\sigma(x) \subseteq Uγσ​(x)⊆U for every x∈Ux \in Ux∈U;
  • a transversal arc Σ=s(J)\Sigma = s(J)Σ=s(J) is the image of a C1C^1C1 embedding sss of an open interval JJJ into MMM with s˙≠0\dot s \ne 0s˙=0 and s˙1f2(s)−s˙2f1(s)≠0\dot s_1 f_2(s) - \dot s_2 f_1(s) \neq 0s˙1​f2​(s)−s˙2​f1​(s)=0 on JJJ. The parameter orders the points of Σ\SigmaΣ.

In Lean, points are Fin 2 → ℝ (general Fin n → ℝ for the Chapter 6 notions), and σ\sigmaσ is a Bool with true for +++. The definitions are lifetime, flow, orbit, halfOrbit, omegaLimitSet, IsPeriodicPoint and IsTransversalArc, all in the namespace TeschlODE.Planar.

Formalization targets

Goal: the generalized Poincaré–Bendixson theorem (Theorem 7.16)

Fix x∈Mx \in Mx∈M and σ\sigmaσ, and suppose ωσ(x)≠∅\omega_\sigma(x) \neq \emptysetωσ​(x)=∅ is compact, connected and contains only finitely many fixed points. Then one of three cases holds:

(i) ωσ(x)={x0}, f(x0)=0;(ii) ωσ(x)=γ(y), y periodic, f(y)≠0;\text{(i) } \omega_\sigma(x) = \{x_0\},\ f(x_0) = 0; \qquad \text{(ii) } \omega_\sigma(x) = \gamma(y),\ y \text{ periodic},\ f(y) \neq 0;(i) ωσ​(x)={x0​}, f(x0​)=0;(ii) ωσ​(x)=γ(y), y periodic, f(y)=0; (iii) every y∈ωσ(x) with f(y)≠0 lies on a non-closed orbit γ(y)⊆ωσ(x) with ω+(y)={a}, ω−(y)={b},\text{(iii) every } y \in \omega_\sigma(x) \text{ with } f(y) \ne 0 \text{ lies on a non-closed orbit } \gamma(y) \subseteq \omega_\sigma(x) \text{ with } \omega_+(y) = \{a\},\ \omega_-(y) = \{b\},(iii) every y∈ωσ​(x) with f(y)=0 lies on a non-closed orbit γ(y)⊆ωσ​(x) with ω+​(y)={a}, ω−​(y)={b},

where a,ba, ba,b are fixed points in ωσ(x)\omega_\sigma(x)ωσ​(x).

Milestones

  1. Lemma 7.9. The successive intersections of γσ(x0)\gamma_\sigma(x_0)γσ​(x0​) with a transversal arc through a regular point x0x_0x0​ are monotone along the arc.
  2. Corollary 7.10. ωσ(x)\omega_\sigma(x)ωσ​(x) meets a transversal arc in at most one point.
  3. Corollary 7.11. If ωσ(x)∩γσ(x)≠∅\omega_\sigma(x) \cap \gamma_\sigma(x) \neq \emptysetωσ​(x)∩γσ​(x)=∅, then xxx is periodic and ω+(x)=ω−(x)=γ(x)\omega_+(x) = \omega_-(x) = \gamma(x)ω+​(x)=ω−​(x)=γ(x).
  4. Corollary 7.12. A minimal compact σ\sigmaσ invariant set is a periodic orbit.
  5. Lemma 7.13 (Poincaré–Bendixson). A nonempty compact ωσ(x)\omega_\sigma(x)ωσ​(x) without fixed points is a regular periodic orbit.
  6. Lemma 7.14. A connected ωσ(x)\omega_\sigma(x)ωσ​(x) that contains a regular periodic orbit γ(y)\gamma(y)γ(y) equals γ(y)\gamma(y)γ(y).
  7. Lemma 7.15. If ωσ(x)\omega_\sigma(x)ωσ​(x) is compact, at most one orbit in ωσ(x)\omega_\sigma(x)ωσ​(x) runs from a fixed point x−x_-x−​ to a distinct fixed point x+x_+x+​.

Significance

The theorem turns the existence of periodic solutions into a topological statement. It is enough to find a compact positively invariant region with no equilibria, often an annulus bounded by two curves on which the vector field points inward. This is how periodic orbits are established for the van der Pol and Liénard equations (Theorem 7.8 of the same chapter) and for many models in biology and chemistry. The generalized version also describes limit sets that contain equilibria, such as homoclinic and heteroclinic cycles. Corollary 7.12 records the dimensional boundary: in the plane every minimal set is a periodic orbit, while from dimension three on minimal sets can be invariant tori with dense orbits.

The results have been proved for over a century. None of them is formalized in Mathlib or on the platform. Mathlib has omegaLimit for global flows on topological spaces and existence and uniqueness of integral curves, but no local flow of a vector field on an open set, no transversal sections and no Jordan curve theorem. This mission produces a machine-checked planar limit-set theory. The local flow and limit-set layer it needs is reusable for every later chapter on dynamical systems.

Difficulty

The statements are topological, and the proofs rest on the Jordan curve theorem for piecewise C1C^1C1 curves: a closed curve made of an orbit segment and a piece of transversal arc separates the plane, and trajectories cannot cross it in the forbidden direction. That theorem is not in Mathlib, and the platform's Jordan-curve and Schoenflies statements are open. Everything that looks one-dimensional in a sketch, "the orbit enters the inside and is trapped", depends on it. The ingredients a sketch treats as obvious also need care: the flow-box straightening (Lemma 6.2), the local return map to a transversal arc (Lemma 6.9), and the invariance, closedness and connectedness of limit sets (Lemmas 6.5–6.6). Generic arguments about compact invariant sets do not suffice: the conclusions are false in R3\mathbb{R}^3R3, so any proof must use planarity.

Formalization scope

  • Points are Fin 2 → ℝ. Its sup norm induces the Euclidean topology, and no statement depends on the norm. fff is a total function with ContDiffOn ℝ 1 f M on the open set MMM.
  • The flow is defined, not assumed. lifetime f M x is the union of domains of integral curves at xxx, and flow f M t x is the value at ttt of such a curve, selected by choice (unique for C1C^1C1 fields). Outside IxI_xIx​ the flow has the junk value xxx, and no statement evaluates it there. Limit points must lie in MMM, as in the book.
  • σ∈{±}\sigma \in \{\pm\}σ∈{±} is a Bool; true means +++ (atTop), false means −-− (atBot).
  • "Periodic" includes fixed points (period zero), as in the book. "Regular periodic" is periodic with f(y)≠0f(y) \neq 0f(y)=0, and "non-closed" is not periodic.
  • A transversal arc is a C1C^1C1 topological embedding of an open interval into MMM. The book says "smooth", so these statements cover a wider class of arcs and are at least as strong as the book's. Lemma 7.9's "monotone sequence of intersections" is stated as: any parametrization uuu of the intersection points (s(u(t))=Φ(t,x0)s(u(t)) = \Phi(t, x_0)s(u(t))=Φ(t,x0​)) is monotone or antitone on the set of intersection times.
  • "Connected" is IsPreconnected; nonemptiness is a separate hypothesis. "Finitely many fixed points" is Set.Finite {y ∈ ω_σ(x) | f y = 0}. The book's "ω±(y)∈{xj}\omega_\pm(y) \in \{x_j\}ω±​(y)∈{xj​}" is ω±(y)={a}\omega_\pm(y) = \{a\}ω±​(y)={a} for a fixed point a∈ωσ(x)a \in \omega_\sigma(x)a∈ωσ​(x). No statement uses O(·), "sufficiently small" or an unspecified constant.
  • The four hypotheses on ωσ(x)\omega_\sigma(x)ωσ​(x) (nonempty, compact, connected, finitely many fixed points) are the book's and are all kept. A formalization that drops one of them, or reads "regular periodic orbit" to include a fixed point, is not the theorem.
  • Needed infrastructure: local existence, uniqueness and continuity of the flow (Chapter 2, 6.1), the flow box, the Jordan curve theorem for piecewise C1C^1C1 curves, and the basic limit-set lemmas of Chapter 6. Contributions of any of these as separate lemmas are welcome, and the Jordan curve theorem in particular is reusable far beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • G. Teschl, Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems, Graduate Studies in Mathematics 140, AMS, 2012 (author's preliminary version, §7.3). doi:10.1090/gsm/140, author's copy
  • I. Bendixson, Sur les courbes définies par des équations différentielles, Acta Mathematica 24 (1901), 1–88. doi:10.1007/BF02403068
  • M. W. Hirsch, S. Smale, R. L. Devaney, Differential Equations, Dynamical Systems, and an Introduction to Chaos, 3rd ed., Academic Press, 2013, Ch. 10. doi:10.1016/C2009-0-61160-0
  • L. Perko, Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems, 3rd ed., Springer, 2001, §3.7. doi:10.1007/978-1-4613-0003-8
16 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
AnalysisControl Theory·Captain: mikedeng1

Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems V: Limit Sets and the Krasovskii–LaSalle PrincipleTextbook

Motivation

Most differential equations that model physical, biological or engineered systems cannot be solved in closed form, yet the question asked about them is usually qualitative: does the system settle down to an equilibrium, and does it stay near the equilibrium when perturbed? Liapunov's direct method answers that question without solving the equation, by exhibiting a function that does not increase along solutions. It is the standard tool of nonlinear stability analysis and of control design, where a controller is typically certified by a Liapunov function for the closed-loop system (Khalil, Nonlinear Systems).

A Liapunov function whose values strictly decrease along every non-constant solution gives asymptotic stability directly. In practice the natural candidate, often the total energy of a damped mechanical system, only satisfies a non-strict inequality. The Krasovskii–LaSalle invariance principle closes that gap: if the function is not constant along any complete orbit other than the equilibrium, the equilibrium is still asymptotically stable. It was established by Barbashin and Krasovskii (1952) and by LaSalle (1960, IRE Trans. Circuit Theory 7).

This mission formalizes Chapter 6 of Teschl, Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems (AMS Graduate Studies in Mathematics 140, 2012; author's preliminary version), from the local flow of an autonomous equation, through limit sets, to the principle itself.

Setting

Fix n∈Nn \in \mathbb{N}n∈N, an open set M⊆RnM \subseteq \mathbb{R}^nM⊆Rn (the phase space) and a vector field f:M→Rnf : M \to \mathbb{R}^nf:M→Rn of class C1C^1C1. The autonomous system is x˙=f(x)\dot x = f(x)x˙=f(x). An integral curve is a differentiable map φ\varphiφ from an open interval JJJ into MMM with φ˙(t)=f(φ(t))\dot\varphi(t) = f(\varphi(t))φ˙​(t)=f(φ(t)) for all t∈Jt \in Jt∈J.

For each x∈Mx \in Mx∈M there is a maximal interval Ix=(T−(x),T+(x))∋0I_x = (T_-(x), T_+(x)) \ni 0Ix​=(T−​(x),T+​(x))∋0 and a unique maximal integral curve t↦Φ(t,x)t \mapsto \Phi(t, x)t↦Φ(t,x) on IxI_xIx​ with Φ(0,x)=x\Phi(0, x) = xΦ(0,x)=x: every integral curve through xxx at time 000 is a restriction of it. The map Φ\PhiΦ on W={(t,x):x∈M, t∈Ix}W = \{(t, x) : x \in M,\ t \in I_x\}W={(t,x):x∈M, t∈Ix​} is the flow. It is a local flow: IxI_xIx​ may be bounded, because solutions can leave MMM or blow up in finite time.

The orbit of xxx is γ(x)={Φ(t,x):t∈Ix}\gamma(x) = \{\Phi(t, x) : t \in I_x\}γ(x)={Φ(t,x):t∈Ix​} and the forward orbit is γ+(x)={Φ(t,x):t∈Ix, t>0}\gamma_+(x) = \{\Phi(t, x) : t \in I_x,\ t > 0\}γ+​(x)={Φ(t,x):t∈Ix​, t>0} (γ−(x)\gamma_-(x)γ−​(x) with t<0t < 0t<0). The ω+\omega_+ω+​-limit set ω+(x)\omega_+(x)ω+​(x) is the set of y∈My \in My∈M with Φ(tk,x)→y\Phi(t_k, x) \to yΦ(tk​,x)→y for some times tk→+∞t_k \to +\inftytk​→+∞ in IxI_xIx​; ω−(x)\omega_-(x)ω−​(x) uses tk→−∞t_k \to -\inftytk​→−∞.

A point x0∈Mx_0 \in Mx0​∈M with f(x0)=0f(x_0) = 0f(x0​)=0 is a fixed point. It is stable if every neighborhood U′U'U′ of x0x_0x0​ contains a neighborhood VVV of x0x_0x0​ such that solutions starting in VVV exist and stay in U′U'U′ for all t≥0t \ge 0t≥0. It is asymptotically stable if moreover Φ(t,x)→x0\Phi(t, x) \to x_0Φ(t,x)→x0​ as t→∞t \to \inftyt→∞ for all xxx in some neighborhood of x0x_0x0​.

A Liapunov function at x0x_0x0​ is a continuous L:U→RL : U \to \mathbb{R}L:U→R on an open neighborhood U⊆MU \subseteq MU⊆M of x0x_0x0​ with L(x0)=0L(x_0) = 0L(x0​)=0, L>0L > 0L>0 on U∖{x0}U \setminus \{x_0\}U∖{x0​}, and L(φ(t0))≥L(φ(t1))L(\varphi(t_0)) \ge L(\varphi(t_1))L(φ(t0​))≥L(φ(t1​)) for every integral curve φ\varphiφ and all t0<t1t_0 < t_1t0​<t1​ with φ(t0),φ(t1)∈U∖{x0}\varphi(t_0), \varphi(t_1) \in U \setminus \{x_0\}φ(t0​),φ(t1​)∈U∖{x0​}. It is strict if the inequality is always strict. SδS_\deltaSδ​ denotes the connected component of {x∈U:L(x)≤δ}\{x \in U : L(x) \le \delta\}{x∈U:L(x)≤δ} containing x0x_0x0​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6.14 (Krasovskii–LaSalle principle)

Let x0x_0x0​ be a fixed point and LLL a Liapunov function at x0x_0x0​ on UUU. Write (∗)(\ast)(∗) for: LLL is not constant on any orbit lying entirely in U∖{x0}U \setminus \{x_0\}U∖{x0​}, i.e. every y∈My \in My∈M with γ(y)⊆U∖{x0}\gamma(y) \subseteq U \setminus \{x_0\}γ(y)⊆U∖{x0​} has points a,b∈γ(y)a, b \in \gamma(y)a,b∈γ(y) with L(a)≠L(b)L(a) \ne L(b)L(a)=L(b). Then

(∗) ⟹ x0 is asymptotically stable;L strict ⟹ (∗);(\ast) \ \Longrightarrow\ x_0 \text{ is asymptotically stable}; \qquad L \text{ strict} \ \Longrightarrow\ (\ast);(∗) ⟹ x0​ is asymptotically stable;L strict ⟹ (∗);

and, under (∗)(\ast)(∗), every x∈Mx \in Mx∈M whose forward orbit lies in a compact subset of UUU satisfies Φ(t,x)→x0\Phi(t, x) \to x_0Φ(t,x)→x0​ as t→∞t \to \inftyt→∞.

Milestones

In attack order: Theorem 6.1 (the maximal flow exists, WWW is open, Φ\PhiΦ is CkC^kCk on WWW, and Φ(t+s,x)=Φ(t,Φ(s,x))\Phi(t+s, x) = \Phi(t, \Phi(s, x))Φ(t+s,x)=Φ(t,Φ(s,x))); Lemma 6.3 (a forward orbit in a compact subset of MMM forces T+(x)=∞T_+(x) = \inftyT+​(x)=∞); Lemma 6.6 (ω±(x)\omega_\pm(x)ω±​(x) is then nonempty, compact and connected); Lemma 6.7 (d(Φ(t,x),ω±(x))→0d(\Phi(t, x), \omega_\pm(x)) \to 0d(Φ(t,x),ω±​(x))→0); Theorem 6.15 (a function non-increasing along γ+(x)⊆U\gamma_+(x) \subseteq Uγ+​(x)⊆U is constant on ω+(x)∩U\omega_+(x) \cap Uω+​(x)∩U); Lemma 6.11 (a closed SδS_\deltaSδ​ is positively invariant); Lemma 6.12 (Sε⊆Bδ(x0)S_\varepsilon \subseteq B_\delta(x_0)Sε​⊆Bδ​(x0​) and Bε(x0)⊆SδB_\varepsilon(x_0) \subseteq S_\deltaBε​(x0​)⊆Sδ​); Theorem 6.13 (Liapunov: a Liapunov function makes x0x_0x0​ stable).

Significance

The result itself. The invariance principle is the form of Liapunov's method used in applications. It gives asymptotic stability of damped mechanical systems from their energy, of gradient systems from their potential, and of adaptive and passivity-based controllers, where the natural Liapunov function is only non-increasing. Its limit-set formulation (Theorem 6.15) is also the entry point to the Poincaré–Bendixson theory of the next chapter, which uses the same ω\omegaω-limit sets.

Formalizing it. Mathlib has local existence and uniqueness for ODEs and a theory of ω\omegaω-limit sets for global flows (omegaLimit, Flow). It has no maximal solution of an ODE, no local flow with its maximal intervals, and no Liapunov stability theory. The results are classical and proved in the book; none has a machine-checked proof on this platform. This mission builds the local-flow and limit-set layer and the Liapunov layer on top of it.

Difficulty

The central difficulty is that the flow is local. The book's arguments pass freely between "the solution stays in a compact set" and "the solution exists for all positive time" (Lemma 6.3). In a formal setting every statement about Φ(t,x)\Phi(t, x)Φ(t,x) must first establish t∈Ixt \in I_xt∈Ix​, and the maximal interval must be constructed from local solutions. Theorem 6.1 on its own requires gluing local solutions into a maximal one and proving that the domain WWW is open with CkC^kCk dependence on initial conditions.

A common first idea is to assume the vector field is complete, so that Mathlib's global Flow and omegaLimit apply directly. That assumption is not available: the goal concerns orbits that stay in the neighborhood UUU, and completeness of such orbits is a consequence of the argument, not a hypothesis. Similarly, LLL is only continuous, so a derivative-based criterion ∇L⋅f≤0\nabla L \cdot f \le 0∇L⋅f≤0 cannot replace condition (6.36).

Formalization scope

The state space is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), so ∣x∣|x|∣x∣ is the Euclidean norm, and Br(x0)B_r(x_0)Br​(x0​) is the open ball Metric.ball. The standing assumption f∈Ck(M,Rn)f \in C^k(M, \mathbb{R}^n)f∈Ck(M,Rn), k≥1k \ge 1k≥1, MMM open, is a binder of every theorem (as ContDiffOn ℝ 1 f M, the weakest case, and for general k≥1k \ge 1k≥1 in Theorem 6.1). The flow enters as a pair (I, Φ) satisfying IsMaximalFlow f M I Φ, which characterizes the maximal integral curves uniquely. Theorem 6.1 proves that such a pair exists, so no completeness or extra regularity is assumed. The two time directions σ∈{±}\sigma \in \{\pm\}σ∈{±} of Lemmas 6.3–6.7 are one statement with a real parameter σ = 1 ∨ σ = -1. The ω\omegaω-limit set contains only points of MMM, as in the book.

Stability conclusions include existence of the solution for all t≥0t \ge 0t≥0. The Liapunov condition quantifies over every integral curve and constrains only the two endpoint values, exactly as (6.36). LLL is a total function whose values off UUU are never read.

Correction to the printed statement. The book's final sentence of Theorem 6.14, "every orbit lying entirely in U(x0)U(x_0)U(x0​) converges to x0x_0x0​", is false as printed. With U=M=R2U = M = \mathbb{R}^2U=M=R2 and a strict Liapunov function, some orbits escape to infinity (Khalil, §4.1). The goal therefore asks for convergence of every forward orbit contained in a compact subset of UUU, which is what the book's argument uses. The other two parts are as printed.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: stability and asymptotic stability are stated for the maximal flow, with existence for all t≥0t \ge 0t≥0 required, and not for an arbitrary map Φ or a flow assumed global. Asymptotic stability keeps both conjuncts, stability and attraction.

Needed infrastructure: maximal solutions of C1C^1C1 autonomous ODEs and their continuation (reusable across Chapters 6–13), openness of WWW and smooth dependence on initial data, compactness arguments for limit sets, and connected components of sublevel sets. Contributions of the local-flow layer as standalone lemmas are especially welcome, since later missions of this series rely on the same objects.

Selected references

  • G. Teschl, Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems, Graduate Studies in Mathematics 140, AMS, 2012; author's preliminary version, Chapter 6, pp. 187–208. https://www.mat.univie.ac.at/~gerald/ftp/book-ode/ode.pdf (published book: https://doi.org/10.1090/gsm/140)
  • J. P. LaSalle, Some extensions of Liapunov's second method, IRE Transactions on Circuit Theory 7 (1960), 520–527. https://doi.org/10.1109/TCT.1960.1086720
  • E. A. Barbashin and N. N. Krasovskii, On global stability of motion, Doklady Akademii Nauk SSSR 86 (1952), 453–456.
  • H. K. Khalil, Nonlinear Systems, 3rd ed., Prentice Hall, 2002, §4.1–4.2. https://www.pearson.com/en-us/subject-catalog/p/nonlinear-systems/P200000003359
19 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Analysis·Captain: mikedeng1

Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems I: Existence, Uniqueness and Peano's TheoremTextbook

Why initial value problems come first

Almost every quantitative statement about an ordinary differential equation, from the stability of an equilibrium to the existence of a periodic orbit, presupposes that the equation has a solution through each initial point and, usually, that this solution is unique and depends continuously on the data. Chapter 2 of Gerald Teschl's graduate textbook Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems (author's preliminary version of AMS GSM 140, 2012) establishes these facts for first-order systems in Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn. It is the foundation for the rest of the series: the flows, limit sets, Poincaré maps and invariant manifolds of later chapters are all built on the existence, uniqueness and extension results proved here.

A short history. Local existence was first proved in the nineteenth century by polygonal approximation (Cauchy) under differentiability-type hypotheses. Lipschitz isolated the condition that bears his name. Picard and Lindelöf established existence and uniqueness by successive approximation, and Banach (1922) abstracted the argument into the contraction principle. Peano (1890) showed that continuity of the right-hand side alone suffices for existence, without uniqueness. Gronwall's inequality and its integral generalisations give the continuous dependence estimates. Teschl's chapter presents all of these in a uniform notation.

Setting

An initial value problem (IVP) is

x˙=f(t,x),x(t0)=x0,(2.10)\dot x = f(t, x), \qquad x(t_0) = x_0, \qquad (2.10)x˙=f(t,x),x(t0​)=x0​,(2.10)

where fff is a continuous map from an open set U⊆R×RnU \subseteq \mathbb{R} \times \mathbb{R}^nU⊆R×Rn to Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn and (t0,x0)∈U(t_0, x_0) \in U(t0​,x0​)∈U. Here ∣x∣|x|∣x∣ is the Euclidean norm on Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn. A solution on an interval III is a function x:I→Rnx : I \to \mathbb{R}^nx:I→Rn whose graph {(t,x(t)):t∈I}\{(t, x(t)) : t \in I\}{(t,x(t)):t∈I} lies in UUU and which is differentiable on III (one-sidedly at an endpoint that belongs to III) with x˙(t)=f(t,x(t))\dot x(t) = f(t, x(t))x˙(t)=f(t,x(t)). Such a solution is automatically continuously differentiable.

The function fff is locally Lipschitz in the second argument, uniformly with respect to the first, if for every compact V0⊆UV_0 \subseteq UV0​⊆U there is a constant LLL with ∣f(t,x)−f(t,y)∣≤L∣x−y∣|f(t,x) - f(t,y)| \le L|x - y|∣f(t,x)−f(t,y)∣≤L∣x−y∣ whenever (t,x),(t,y)∈V0(t,x), (t,y) \in V_0(t,x),(t,y)∈V0​ (the book's (2.18)).

For T,δ>0T, \delta > 0T,δ>0 let V=[t0,t0+T]×Bˉδ(x0)V = [t_0, t_0 + T] \times \bar B_\delta(x_0)V=[t0​,t0​+T]×Bˉδ​(x0​), where Bˉδ(x0)={x:∣x−x0∣≤δ}\bar B_\delta(x_0) = \{x : |x - x_0| \le \delta\}Bˉδ​(x0​)={x:∣x−x0​∣≤δ}, let M=max⁡V∣f∣M = \max_V |f|M=maxV​∣f∣, and define the existence time

T0=min⁡{T,δM},with δM=∞ when M=0.T_0 = \min\Bigl\{T, \frac{\delta}{M}\Bigr\}, \qquad \text{with } \frac{\delta}{M} = \infty \text{ when } M = 0 .T0​=min{T,Mδ​},with Mδ​=∞ when M=0.

The chapter also works in a real Banach space XXX, a complete normed real vector space, where a contraction of a closed set C⊆XC \subseteq XC⊆X is a map K:C→CK : C \to CK:C→C with ∥K(x)−K(y)∥≤θ∥x−y∥\|K(x) - K(y)\| \le \theta\|x - y\|∥K(x)−K(y)∥≤θ∥x−y∥ for some θ∈[0,1)\theta \in [0, 1)θ∈[0,1).

Formalization targets

Goal: Peano's existence theorem (Theorem 2.19)

If fff is continuous on V=[t0,t0+T]×Bˉδ(x0)V = [t_0, t_0 + T] \times \bar B_\delta(x_0)V=[t0​,t0​+T]×Bˉδ​(x0​) and M=max⁡V∣f∣M = \max_V |f|M=maxV​∣f∣, then there is a function xxx with x(t0)=x0x(t_0) = x_0x(t0​)=x0​ solving

x˙(t)=f(t,x(t)),∣x(t)−x0∣≤δ,t∈[t0,t0+T0],\dot x(t) = f(t, x(t)), \qquad |x(t) - x_0| \le \delta, \qquad t \in [t_0, t_0 + T_0],x˙(t)=f(t,x(t)),∣x(t)−x0​∣≤δ,t∈[t0​,t0​+T0​],

and the analogous statement holds on [t0−T0,t0][t_0 - T_0, t_0][t0​−T0​,t0​] with V=[t0−T,t0]×Bˉδ(x0)V = [t_0 - T, t_0] \times \bar B_\delta(x_0)V=[t0​−T,t0​]×Bˉδ​(x0​). No Lipschitz condition is assumed and the solution need not be unique.

Milestones

  1. Theorem 2.1 (contraction principle). A contraction of a nonempty closed subset of a Banach space has a unique fixed point xˉ\bar xxˉ, and ∥Km(x)−xˉ∥≤θm1−θ∥K(x)−x∥\|K^m(x) - \bar x\| \le \frac{\theta^m}{1-\theta}\|K(x) - x\|∥Km(x)−xˉ∥≤1−θθm​∥K(x)−x∥ for every x∈Cx \in Cx∈C.
  2. Theorem 2.2 (Picard–Lindelöf). Under the local Lipschitz condition, (2.10) has a solution on an open interval around t0t_0t0​; two solutions on any interval containing t0t_0t0​ coincide; and a solution exists on [t0,t0+T0][t_0, t_0 + T_0][t0​,t0​+T0​] with graph in VVV (and on [t0−T0,t0][t_0 - T_0, t_0][t0​−T0​,t0​]).
  3. Theorem 2.4 (Weissinger). If ∥Km(x)−Km(y)∥≤θm∥x−y∥\|K^m(x) - K^m(y)\| \le \theta_m\|x - y\|∥Km(x)−Km(y)∥≤θm​∥x−y∥ with ∑θm<∞\sum \theta_m < \infty∑θm​<∞, then KKK has a unique fixed point and ∥Km(x)−xˉ∥≤(∑j≥mθj)∥K(x)−x∥\|K^m(x) - \bar x\| \le \bigl(\sum_{j \ge m}\theta_j\bigr)\|K(x) - x\|∥Km(x)−xˉ∥≤(∑j≥m​θj​)∥K(x)−x∥.
  4. Lemma 2.7 (generalised Gronwall). ψ≤α+∫0tβψ\psi \le \alpha + \int_0^t \beta\psiψ≤α+∫0t​βψ with β≥0\beta \ge 0β≥0 implies ψ(t)≤α(t)+∫0tα(s)β(s)e∫stβ ds\psi(t) \le \alpha(t) + \int_0^t \alpha(s)\beta(s)e^{\int_s^t \beta}\,dsψ(t)≤α(t)+∫0t​α(s)β(s)e∫st​βds, and ψ(t)≤α(t)e∫0tβ\psi(t) \le \alpha(t)e^{\int_0^t\beta}ψ(t)≤α(t)e∫0t​β for nondecreasing α\alphaα.
  5. Theorem 2.8 (continuous dependence). ∣x(t)−y(t)∣≤∣x0−y0∣eL∣t−t0∣+ML(eL∣t−t0∣−1)|x(t) - y(t)| \le |x_0 - y_0|e^{L|t-t_0|} + \frac{M}{L}(e^{L|t-t_0|} - 1)∣x(t)−y(t)∣≤∣x0​−y0​∣eL∣t−t0​∣+LM​(eL∣t−t0​∣−1) for solutions of x˙=f(t,x)\dot x = f(t,x)x˙=f(t,x) and y˙=g(t,y)\dot y = g(t,y)y˙​=g(t,y).
  6. Theorem 2.17 (global existence). If ∣f(t,x)∣≤M(T)+L(T)∣x∣|f(t,x)| \le M(T) + L(T)|x|∣f(t,x)∣≤M(T)+L(T)∣x∣ on [−T,T]×Rn[-T, T] \times \mathbb{R}^n[−T,T]×Rn for every T>0T > 0T>0, every solution extends to all of R\mathbb{R}R.
  7. Theorem 2.18 (Arzelà–Ascoli). A bounded, equicontinuous sequence in C([a,b],Rn)C([a,b], \mathbb{R}^n)C([a,b],Rn) has a uniformly convergent subsequence.

Significance

Peano's theorem is the existence statement with the weakest regularity hypothesis on fff in the classical theory. It is what lets one speak of solutions of equations with non-Lipschitz right-hand sides, such as x˙=∣x∣\dot x = \sqrt{|x|}x˙=∣x∣​, and it is the starting point for the theory of non-unique solutions and differential inclusions. The explicit existence time T0=min⁡{T,δ/M}T_0 = \min\{T, \delta/M\}T0​=min{T,δ/M} is the quantitative form used whenever one needs a uniform lower bound on the lifetime of solutions starting in a compact set. Picard–Lindelöf, Gronwall and continuous dependence together make the IVP well posed. The global existence theorem under linear growth is used throughout the later chapters to define global flows.

Mathlib already contains a Picard–Lindelöf theorem (IsPicardLindelof), Gronwall's inequality in differential form, the Banach fixed point theorem for complete (extended) metric spaces, and an Arzelà–Ascoli theorem for bounded continuous functions. It does not contain Peano's theorem, the integral form of the generalised Gronwall inequality with variable α\alphaα, Weissinger's theorem, or global existence under linear growth. The statements here are phrased in the book's setting: one-sided intervals, the M=0M = 0M=0 convention for T0T_0T0​, local Lipschitz conditions on an open set, Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn-valued functions. Connecting them to the existing Mathlib results is part of the work.

Difficulty

For Peano's theorem the obvious approach, Picard iteration, does not apply. Without a Lipschitz condition the integral operator x↦x0+∫t0tf(s,x(s)) dsx \mapsto x_0 + \int_{t_0}^t f(s, x(s))\,dsx↦x0​+∫t0​t​f(s,x(s))ds need not be a contraction on any ball, its fixed points need not be unique, and a sequence of approximate solutions need not converge. Any argument has to produce a solution without a uniqueness mechanism and still reach the full interval [t0,t0+T0][t_0, t_0 + T_0][t0​,t0​+T0​] that the theorem specifies, not merely some shorter one. On the formal side, derivatives relative to closed intervals, the M=0M = 0M=0 corner of T0T_0T0​, and passing between the differential and the integral form of the IVP all need care.

For Theorem 2.17 the difficulty is that "every solution is defined on all of R\mathbb{R}R" is a statement about maximal solutions, and the book defines these only through a gluing construction. Without a Lipschitz condition that construction is no longer unique. An a-priori bound on ∣x(t)∣|x(t)|∣x(t)∣ alone does not give extension beyond a finite endpoint.

Formalization scope

  • State space. Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), so ∣x∣|x|∣x∣ is the Euclidean norm. The right-hand side is a total function f:R×Rn→Rnf : \mathbb{R} \times \mathbb{R}^n \to \mathbb{R}^nf:R×Rn→Rn; hypotheses restrict attention to UUU or VVV. Banach spaces are real normed spaces with CompleteSpace.
  • Solutions. IsSolutionOn U f I x: for every t∈It \in It∈I, (t,x(t))∈U(t, x(t)) \in U(t,x(t))∈U and xxx has derivative f(t,x(t))f(t, x(t))f(t,x(t)) at ttt relative to III. Initial conditions are separate hypotheses.
  • Closed ball. The book writes the open ball Bδ(x0)B_\delta(x_0)Bδ​(x0​) in Theorems 2.2 and 2.19 but takes a maximum over VVV and uses ∣x(t)−x0∣≤δ|x(t) - x_0| \le \delta∣x(t)−x0​∣≤δ in the proofs. The statements use the closed ball: over the open ball the maximum may not exist, and the solution can reach the sphere at t0+T0t_0 + T_0t0​+T0​.
  • Quantifier readings. "The maximum of ∣f∣|f|∣f∣ on VVV" is a variable MMM with IsGreatest {|f(p)| : p ∈ V} M. T0T_0T0​ is if M = 0 then T else min T (δ / M). "Some interval around t0t_0t0​" in Theorem 2.2 is ∃ε>0\exists \varepsilon > 0∃ε>0 with (t0−ε,t0+ε)(t_0 - \varepsilon, t_0 + \varepsilon)(t0​−ε,t0​+ε), and "unique" means uniqueness on every interval containing t0t_0t0​. In Theorem 2.8 the suprema LLL, MMM of (2.41) become arbitrary constants L≥0L \ge 0L≥0, MMM bounding the same quantities, which is equivalent because the bound is monotone in both; the case L=0L = 0L=0 uses the limit M∣t−t0∣M|t - t_0|M∣t−t0​∣. In Theorem 2.17 the constants M(T),L(T)M(T), L(T)M(T),L(T) are existential inside ∀T>0\forall T > 0∀T>0, so they may depend on TTT but not on xxx. "All solutions are defined for all ttt" means that every solution on an open interval extends to a solution on R\mathbb{R}R.
  • Hypotheses of Theorem 2.17. Section 2.6 opens with a standing assumption of local uniqueness, but Theorem 2.17's own text needs only continuity and (2.66), and the book's remark after Theorem 2.13 covers maximal solutions without uniqueness. The statement assumes only continuity of fff and (2.66); it is therefore at least as strong as the book's.
  • Added regularity. Lemma 2.7 assumes ψ,α,β\psi, \alpha, \betaψ,α,β continuous on [0,T][0, T][0,T], which the book leaves implicit.
  • Ruling out trivial readings. An existence statement in which the interval collapses to a point would be trivially true. Here T,δ>0T, \delta > 0T,δ>0 are required, T0=TT_0 = TT0​=T when M=0M = 0M=0 (never Lean's δ/0=0\delta/0 = 0δ/0=0), and a solution must satisfy the differential equation at every point of [t0,t0+T0][t_0, t_0 + T_0][t0​,t0​+T0​] with the book's T0T_0T0​, not on some unspecified shorter interval.

A complete development needs derivatives within intervals, interval integrals, uniform convergence and compactness in C([a,b],Rn)C([a,b], \mathbb{R}^n)C([a,b],Rn). The definitions IsSolutionOn and LocallyLipschitzSecond are reused throughout the Teschl series. Contributions that connect these statements to Mathlib's IsPicardLindelof, ContractingWith and BoundedContinuousFunction.arzela_ascoli are welcome.

Selected references

  • G. Teschl, Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems, Graduate Studies in Mathematics 140, American Mathematical Society, 2012. Author's preliminary version: https://www.mat.univie.ac.at/~gerald/ftp/book-ode/ode.pdf ; published version: https://doi.org/10.1090/gsm/140
  • G. Peano, Démonstration de l'intégrabilité des équations différentielles ordinaires, Mathematische Annalen 37 (1890), 182–228. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01200235
  • S. Banach, Sur les opérations dans les ensembles abstraits et leur application aux équations intégrales, Fundamenta Mathematicae 3 (1922), 133–181. https://doi.org/10.4064/fm-3-1-133-181
10 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Algorithmic Game TheoryProbabilityStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

On the Global Convergence of Stochastic Fictitious Play II: Almost Sure Convergence in Zero-Sum Games and Symmetric Games with an Interior ESSResearch Paper

Motivation

Fictitious play is the oldest model of learning in games: players repeatedly play a fixed normal form game, and each round every player best-responds to the empirical frequencies of the opponents' past play. Brown (1951) proposed it as an algorithm for computing the value of a zero-sum game, and Robinson (1951) proved that the empirical frequencies converge to the set of equilibria in that case. In stochastic fictitious play (Fudenberg and Kreps 1993) each player's payoffs are perturbed by fresh random shocks before every choice. The shocks make best responses single-valued and smooth in beliefs, which puts the process within reach of stochastic approximation theory: its long-run behaviour is governed by a deterministic perturbed best response dynamic.

Before Hofbauer and Sandholm (2002), convergence of stochastic fictitious play was known only for 2×2 games (Fudenberg and Kreps 1993; Kaniovski and Young 1995) and for certain games with two strategies per player (Benaïm and Hirsch 1999). The difficulty was the perturbed dynamic itself, whose vector field involves choice probabilities with no closed form for general noise distributions. Hofbauer and Sandholm showed that every such dynamic can be rewritten with a deterministic payoff perturbation (their Theorem 2.1), and used that to carry Lyapunov functions over to arbitrary noise distributions. This mission covers the first two classes of games in their main convergence theorem: symmetric games with an interior evolutionarily stable strategy, and two player zero-sum games.

Setting

A two player normal form game has strategy sets S1={1,…,n1}S^1 = \{1,\dots,n^1\}S1={1,…,n1} and S2={1,…,n2}S^2 = \{1,\dots,n^2\}S2={1,…,n2} and utilities uα:S1×S2→Ru^\alpha : S^1 \times S^2 \to \mathbb Ruα:S1×S2→R. Player α\alphaα's mixed strategies form the simplex ΔSα\Delta S^\alphaΔSα, and Σ=ΔS1×ΔS2\Sigma = \Delta S^1 \times \Delta S^2Σ=ΔS1×ΔS2. The payoff vector Uα(x−α)∈RnαU^\alpha(x^{-\alpha}) \in \mathbb R^{n^\alpha}Uα(x−α)∈Rnα lists the expected payoff of each pure strategy of α\alphaα against the opponent's mixed strategy. The game is zero-sum if u1(s)=−u2(s)u^1(s) = -u^2(s)u1(s)=−u2(s) for every profile sss.

Each player α\alphaα has a shock density fαf^\alphafα on Rnα\mathbb R^{n^\alpha}Rnα. The choice function Cα(π)i=P(argmax⁡jπj+εj=i)C^\alpha(\pi)_i = P(\operatorname{argmax}_j \pi_j + \varepsilon_j = i)Cα(π)i​=P(argmaxj​πj​+εj​=i), for ε\varepsilonε with density fαf^\alphafα, gives the perturbed best response B~α(x−α)=Cα(Uα(x−α))\tilde B^\alpha(x^{-\alpha}) = C^\alpha(U^\alpha(x^{-\alpha}))B~α(x−α)=Cα(Uα(x−α)). The densities are required to be strictly positive with continuously differentiable choice functions ("the conditions of Theorem 2.1").

Standard stochastic fictitious play. Pure strategies are identified with basis vectors eie_iei​. Choices ζ1\zeta_1ζ1​ are arbitrary. At every time t≥1t \ge 1t≥1 each player α\alphaα draws a shock εtα\varepsilon^\alpha_tεtα​ with density fαf^\alphafα and plays at time t+1t+1t+1 the pure strategy maximizing Ukα(Zt−α)+(εtα)kU^\alpha_k(Z^{-\alpha}_t) + (\varepsilon^\alpha_t)_kUkα​(Zt−α​)+(εtα​)k​, where the beliefs are the time averages

Zt=1t∑u=1tζu∈Σ.Z_t = \frac1t \sum_{u=1}^t \zeta_u \in \Sigma .Zt​=t1​u=1∑t​ζu​∈Σ.

The shocks are independent over time and across players. The expected motion of ZtZ_tZt​ is the perturbed best response dynamic

(P)x˙α=B~α(x−α)−xαon Σ.\text{(P)}\qquad \dot x^\alpha = \tilde B^\alpha(x^{-\alpha}) - x^\alpha \quad\text{on } \Sigma .(P)x˙α=B~α(x−α)−xαon Σ.

Symmetric games. A two player game is symmetric if S1=S2={1,…,m}S^1 = S^2 = \{1,\dots,m\}S1=S2={1,…,m} and u1(i,j)=u2(j,i)u^1(i,j) = u^2(j,i)u1(i,j)=u2(j,i); it is described by the matrix Aij=u1(i,j)A_{ij} = u^1(i,j)Aij​=u1(i,j), and U1(z)=AzU^1(z) = AzU1(z)=Az. In symmetric stochastic fictitious play two players in roles 1 and 2 play at every time, their shocks are independent and identically distributed with one density fff, and the state is the average of all past plays in both roles,

Z^t=12t∑u=1t(ζ^u1+ζ^u2)∈ΔS1.\hat Z_t = \frac1{2t}\sum_{u=1}^t \big(\hat\zeta^1_u + \hat\zeta^2_u\big) \in \Delta S^1 .Z^t​=2t1​u=1∑t​(ζ^​u1​+ζ^​u2​)∈ΔS1.

Its mean dynamic is (SP) x˙=C(Ax)−x\text{(SP)}\ \dot x = C(Ax) - x(SP) x˙=C(Ax)−x on ΔS1\Delta S^1ΔS1. A mixed strategy x∗x^*x∗ in the interior of ΔS1\Delta S^1ΔS1 is an interior evolutionarily stable strategy (ESS) if x∗⋅Ax>x⋅Axx^*\cdot Ax > x\cdot Axx∗⋅Ax>x⋅Ax for all mixed x≠x∗x \ne x^*x=x∗ near x∗x^*x∗.

Rest points and chain recurrence. For a dynamic x˙=F(x)\dot x = F(x)x˙=F(x) on a compact set XXX, the rest points are the zeros of FFF in XXX. A point xxx is chain recurrent if for every ε>0\varepsilon > 0ε>0 one can return from xxx to xxx by following solution segments of length at least 111, with jumps of size less than ε\varepsilonε between segments.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6.1 (i) and (ii)

(i) If AAA has an interior ESS, then (SP) has a unique rest point x^\hat xx^ and

P(lim⁡t→∞Z^t=x^)=1.P\Big(\lim_{t\to\infty} \hat Z_t = \hat x\Big) = 1 .P(t→∞lim​Z^t​=x^)=1.

(ii) If the two player game is zero-sum, then (P) has a unique rest point x∗x^*x∗ and

P(lim⁡t→∞Zt=x∗)=1.P\Big(\lim_{t\to\infty} Z_t = x^*\Big) = 1 .P(t→∞lim​Zt​=x∗)=1.

Both hold for all shock densities meeting the conditions of Theorem 2.1, all probability spaces carrying the shocks, and all initial choices.

Milestones

  1. Theorem 2.1: for such a density, the choice function CCC is the unique maximizer C(π)=argmax⁡y∈int⁡Δ(y⋅π−V(y))C(\pi) = \operatorname{argmax}_{y \in \operatorname{int}\Delta}(y\cdot\pi - V(y))C(π)=argmaxy∈intΔ​(y⋅π−V(y)) for one admissible deterministic perturbation VVV.
  2. With an interior ESS, Λ^(x)=x⋅Ax−V(x)−W(Ax)\hat\Lambda(x) = x\cdot Ax - V(x) - W(Ax)Λ^(x)=x⋅Ax−V(x)−W(Ax), where W(π)=max⁡y(y⋅π−V(y))W(\pi) = \max_y (y\cdot\pi - V(y))W(π)=maxy​(y⋅π−V(y)), is strictly concave and a strict Lyapunov function for the deterministically perturbed dynamic (SPV).
  3. Its maximizer is the unique chain recurrent point of (SPV).
  4. In zero-sum games, Λ(x1,x2)=−V1(x1)−W1(U1(x2))−V2(x2)−W2(U2(x1))\Lambda(x^1,x^2) = -V^1(x^1) - W^1(U^1(x^2)) - V^2(x^2) - W^2(U^2(x^1))Λ(x1,x2)=−V1(x1)−W1(U1(x2))−V2(x2)−W2(U2(x1)) is strictly concave and a strict Lyapunov function for (PV).
  5. Its maximizer is the unique chain recurrent point of (P).
  6. The maximizer of Λ^\hat\LambdaΛ^ is the unique chain recurrent point of (SP).

Significance

The theorem gives global, almost sure convergence of a learning process for arbitrary noise distributions, not only for the logit (Gumbel) noise under which the perturbed dynamic has a closed form. For zero-sum games it is the stochastic counterpart of Robinson's theorem. For symmetric games with an interior ESS it shows that a population learning by stochastic fictitious play settles at a single mixed state. Since the choice functions are continuous, the players' choice probabilities converge as well. The limit is the rest point of the perturbed dynamic, which approximates a Nash equilibrium (in case (i), the ESS) as the noise vanishes.

On the formal side, the paper's results are proved, but no part of them is machine-checked, and the platform has no model of learning in games, of chain recurrence, or of stochastic approximation. The mission produces a formal model of stochastic fictitious play as a random process, formal statements of the Hofbauer and Hofbauer–Hopkins Lyapunov functions, and the chain recurrence characterizations that connect them to the process.

Difficulty

The obvious route replaces the process ZtZ_tZt​ by the ODE (P) and argues that (P) converges. That step is where the argument is incomplete: convergence of every solution of (P) does not give convergence of the stochastic process, because a stochastic approximation can in principle circulate near a set of orbits the ODE never follows. The right invariant is the chain recurrent set, and the limit sets of the process lie in a connected component of it (Benaïm and Hirsch 1999; Benaïm 1999). The characterization therefore has to be of chain recurrence, which is strictly weaker than asymptotic stability of individual orbits.

The second obstacle is that (P) itself is defined through the noise distribution and admits no useful Lyapunov function in general. The Lyapunov functions exist for the deterministic form (PV)/(SPV), and moving between the two forms requires the representation of Theorem 2.1, whose perturbation VVV has no closed form either.

Formalization scope

Players and strategies are indexed from 000. Mixed profiles live in ∏αRnα\prod_\alpha \mathbb R^{n^\alpha}∏α​Rnα and every vector field is defined on that ambient space. The processes are defined pathwise from a family of shock vectors on an arbitrary probability space. Ties in the argmax are broken by the smallest index, an event of probability zero because the shocks have densities. The shock drawn at time ttt produces the choice at time t+1t+1t+1. Shock densities are arbitrary strictly positive densities with continuously differentiable choice functions; no noise law is fixed, and the two players' densities in (ii) may differ. Independence is joint over times and players (and roles in (i)). The symmetric process has its own state in one simplex and is not the standard process applied to a symmetric game.

Deterministic perturbations are functions defined on the whole space whose values off the open simplex are ignored; derivatives are taken of their composition with the projection onto the affine plane {∑iyi=1}\{\sum_i y_i = 1\}{∑i​yi​=1}. Perturbed best responses in (PV) and (SPV) are supplied as maps together with the hypothesis that they are the unique maximizers. A strict Lyapunov function must increase strictly along every non-constant solution on (0,∞)(0,\infty)(0,∞). The ESS definition includes x≠x∗x \ne x^*x=x∗, which the source omits.

The conclusions assert existence and uniqueness of the rest point; they are not hypotheses. A statement for the ODE (P) in place of the process ZtZ_tZt​, for one fixed noise law, or with the ESS as the limit point would be a different theorem.

A complete development needs Theorem 2.1 (convex duality and the Legendre transform on the simplex), existence and uniqueness of solutions of (P), basic chain recurrence theory, and the stochastic approximation results of Benaïm and Hirsch, which are not restated here and are welcome as independent contributions. The model layer (games, payoff vectors, choice functions, stochastic fictitious play) is shared with the other missions of this series.

Selected references

  • J. Hofbauer and W. H. Sandholm, On the Global Convergence of Stochastic Fictitious Play, Econometrica 70(6), 2265–2294, 2002. https://doi.org/10.1111/1468-0262.00376 (theorem numbers and pages here follow the authors' manuscript of February 21, 2002).
  • D. Fudenberg and D. M. Kreps, Learning Mixed Equilibria, Games and Economic Behavior 5, 320–367, 1993. https://doi.org/10.1006/game.1993.1021
  • Y. M. Kaniovski and H. P. Young, Learning Dynamics in Games with Stochastic Perturbations, Games and Economic Behavior 11, 330–363, 1995. https://doi.org/10.1006/game.1995.1054
  • M. Benaïm and M. W. Hirsch, Mixed Equilibria and Dynamical Systems Arising from Fictitious Play in Perturbed Games, Games and Economic Behavior 29, 36–72, 1999. https://doi.org/10.1006/game.1999.0717
  • M. Benaïm, Dynamics of Stochastic Approximation Algorithms, Séminaire de Probabilités XXXIII, Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1709, 1–68, 1999. https://doi.org/10.1007/BFb0096509
  • J. Robinson, An Iterative Method of Solving a Game, Annals of Mathematics 54, 296–301, 1951. https://doi.org/10.2307/1969530
  • J. Hofbauer and E. Hopkins, Learning in Perturbed Asymmetric Games, Games and Economic Behavior 52, 133–152, 2005. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.geb.2004.06.006
12 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Control TheoryGraph TheoryLinear algebra·Captain: mikedeng1

On Controllability of Delayed Boolean Control Networks: Trajectory Controllability Avoiding Forbidden Trajectories Iff the Reduced Transition-Count Matrix Is IrreducibleResearch Paper

Motivation

Boolean networks model gene regulatory networks by giving each gene an on/off value and updating all values synchronously by logical rules (Kauffman, 1969). Adding external Boolean inputs gives Boolean control networks (BCNs), in which a designer (a drug, an intervention) chooses the inputs over time. The basic control-theoretic question is controllability: can the inputs drive the network from any configuration to any other? Cheng and Qi (Automatica 2009) answered it for BCNs using the semi-tensor product of matrices, which rewrites a BCN as a linear recursion on canonical basis vectors.

Biological regulation is not instantaneous: transcription and translation introduce delays, so the next value of a gene can depend on several past values. Lu, Zhong, Ho, Tang and Cao (SIAM J. Control Optim. 2016) study delayed BCNs, in which the update reads the last μ\muμ states, and give criteria for two kinds of controllability, including the case where some configurations are dangerous and must be avoided (in biology, states corresponding to disease). The mission formalizes their criteria.

Setting

Write D={0,1}\mathcal D=\{0,1\}D={0,1}. A state is x=(x1,…,xn)∈Dnx=(x_1,\dots,x_n)\in\mathcal D^nx=(x1​,…,xn​)∈Dn and an input value is u∈Dmu\in\mathcal D^mu∈Dm. Fix μ≥1\mu\ge1μ≥1. The delayed BCN (2.2) is

xi(t+1)=fi(u(t),x(t−μ+1),…,x(t)),i=1,…,n,x_i(t+1)=f_i\big(u(t),x(t-\mu+1),\dots,x(t)\big),\qquad i=1,\dots,n,xi​(t+1)=fi​(u(t),x(t−μ+1),…,x(t)),i=1,…,n,

with arbitrary Boolean functions fi:Dm+μn→Df_i:\mathcal D^{m+\mu n}\to\mathcal Dfi​:Dm+μn→D, collected into one map FFF with x(t+1)=F(u(t),X(t))x(t+1)=F(u(t),X(t))x(t+1)=F(u(t),X(t)). A trajectory is the window X(t)=(x(t−μ+1),…,x(t))X(t)=(x(t-\mu+1),\dots,x(t))X(t)=(x(t−μ+1),…,x(t)) of the last μ\muμ states; its last entry is the current state. One step maps X(t)X(t)X(t) under the input u(t)u(t)u(t) to X(t+1)=(x(t−μ+2),…,x(t+1))X(t+1)=(x(t-\mu+2),\dots,x(t+1))X(t+1)=(x(t−μ+2),…,x(t+1)). A control sequence of length kkk is U=(u(0),…,u(k−1))U=(u(0),\dots,u(k-1))U=(u(0),…,u(k−1)), with inputs chosen freely; y(i)=X(i)y(i)=X(i)y(i)=X(i) denotes the trajectory after iii steps from an initial trajectory y(0)y(0)y(0).

The transition-count matrix QQQ has rows and columns indexed by trajectories: Qb,aQ_{b,a}Qb,a​ is the number of input values uuu taking trajectory aaa to trajectory bbb in one step. For a set CtC_tCt​ of forbidden trajectories, QCtQ_{C_t}QCt​​ is QQQ with the rows and columns of CtC_tCt​ replaced by zeros, and QCt\mathbb Q_{C_t}QCt​​ is QQQ with those rows and columns deleted.

The notions of controllability are:

  • Trajectory controllable (Definition 3.1): from every initial trajectory, every trajectory XdX_dXd​ equals X(k)X(k)X(k) for some k≥1k\ge1k≥1 and some control sequence.
  • Trajectory controllable under CtC_tCt​ (Definition 3.11): for all trajectories a,b∉Cta,b\notin C_ta,b∈/Ct​ there are k≥0k\ge0k≥0 and a control sequence steering y(0)=ay(0)=ay(0)=a to y(k)=by(k)=by(k)=b with y(i)∉Cty(i)\notin C_ty(i)∈/Ct​ for i=0,…,ki=0,\dots,ki=0,…,k.
  • State controllable (Definition 4.1): from every initial trajectory, every state equals x(k)x(k)x(k) for some k>0k>0k>0 and some control sequence.

A real square matrix AAA of size N≥2N\ge2N≥2 is reducible (Definition 3.7) if a simultaneous permutation of rows and columns brings it to block upper-triangular form (A11A120A22)\begin{pmatrix}A_{11}&A_{12}\\0&A_{22}\end{pmatrix}(A11​0​A12​A22​​) with square diagonal blocks; it is irreducible otherwise, so every 1×11\times11×1 matrix is irreducible.

N1(k;ya,yb,Ct)\mathbb N_1(k;y_a,y_b,C_t)N1​(k;ya​,yb​,Ct​) counts the control sequences of length kkk steering yay_aya​ to yby_byb​ while avoiding CtC_tCt​; N2(k;a,bs)\mathbb N_2(k;a,b_s)N2​(k;a,bs​) counts those steering the initial trajectory aaa to x(k)=bsx(k)=b_sx(k)=bs​; Ξμp\Xi^{p}_\muΞμp​ is the set of trajectories with current state ppp.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.12

the delayed BCN is trajectory controllable under Ct  ⟺  QCt is irreducible,\text{the delayed BCN is trajectory controllable under } C_t\iff \mathbb Q_{C_t}\ \text{is irreducible},the delayed BCN is trajectory controllable under Ct​⟺QCt​​ is irreducible,

for every μ≥1\mu\ge1μ≥1, nnn, mmm, every update map and every forbidden set CtC_tCt​. It is the most general criterion of the paper.

Milestones

  • Proposition 3.5: for k>0k>0k>0, N1(k;ya,yb,Ct)=ybT(QCt)kya\mathbb N_1(k;y_a,y_b,C_t)=y_b^{\mathsf T}(Q_{C_t})^ky_aN1​(k;ya​,yb​,Ct​)=ybT​(QCt​​)kya​.
  • Remark 3: N1(k;ya,yb)=ybTQkya\mathbb N_1(k;y_a,y_b)=y_b^{\mathsf T}Q^ky_aN1​(k;ya​,yb​)=ybT​Qkya​.
  • Theorem 3.10: trajectory controllable   ⟺  \iff⟺ QQQ irreducible.
  • Theorem 4.3: N2(k;a,bs)=∑b∈ΞμbsbTQka\mathbb N_2(k;a,b_s)=\sum_{b\in\Xi^{b_s}_\mu}b^{\mathsf T}Q^kaN2​(k;a,bs​)=∑b∈Ξμbs​​​bTQka.
  • Theorem 5.1: the same count while avoiding forbidden states CsC_sCs​, with QQQ zeroed on the trajectories containing a state of CsC_sCs​.
  • Corollary 5.3: trajectory controllability implies state controllability.

A supporting item, Lemma 3.9 (corrected form), relates Definition 3.7 to positivity of entries of powers for nonnegative matrices of size at least 2.

Significance

The criteria replace a question about control sequences of unbounded length by a finite test on one nonnegative integer matrix of size 2μn2^{\mu n}2μn. The counting identities give more than a yes/no answer: they enumerate the control sequences achieving a transfer, which is what a designer choosing among interventions needs, and they handle forbidden states by passing to forbidden trajectories.

The results are proved in the paper; none of them has a machine-checked proof. Formalizing them yields a reusable Lean model of delayed (and, for μ=1\mu=1μ=1, ordinary) Boolean control networks defined directly through their dynamics, together with a checked bridge from dynamic reachability to the combinatorics of nonnegative matrices. A formal version also pins down points the printed text leaves loose: Lemma 3.9 as printed is false (it characterizes primitive, not irreducible, matrices), and the two different matrices QCtQ_{C_t}QCt​​ (zeroed) and QCt\mathbb Q_{C_t}QCt​​ (deleted) must not be confused.

Difficulty

The central step is the passage between three objects: reachability under the dynamics, positivity of entries of powers of QQQ, and the block-triangular definition of irreducibility. The counting identity for powers of QQQ is a statement about sequences of inputs, not about paths in a graph, so the bijection between control sequences and weighted walks has to be established with the avoidance constraint carried at every intermediate time, including the endpoints. The equivalence between Definition 3.7 and strong connectivity is the classical graph-theoretic characterization, but it has edge cases the obvious argument misses: a 1×11\times11×1 zero matrix is irreducible by Definition 3.7 yet has no positive power, which is exactly why Definition 3.11 allows k=0k=0k=0 while Definition 3.1 does not. A proof that routes through "some power of QCt\mathbb Q_{C_t}QCt​​ is entrywise positive", following the printed Lemma 3.9, proves a false intermediate statement.

Formalization scope

Conventions committed to in Lean:

  • A state is Fin n → Bool (true is the paper's 1); a trajectory is Fin μ → State n with index 0 the oldest state and index μ−1\mu-1μ−1 the current state; μ≥1\mu\ge1μ≥1 is a standing assumption (NeZero μ); n,m≥0n,m\ge0n,m≥0 are arbitrary and no assumption is placed on the update functions.
  • Matrices are indexed by trajectories rather than by the paper's index jjj of δ2μnj\delta^j_{2^{\mu n}}δ2μnj​. The paper's Q=L⋉12mQ=L\ltimes\mathbf 1_{2^m}Q=L⋉12m​ is obtained by the simultaneous relabelling of Lemma 2.6, and every statement (entries of powers, sums over sets of trajectories, Definition 3.7) is invariant under it. QCt\mathbb Q_{C_t}QCt​​ is indexed by the subtype of allowed trajectories.
  • Irreducibility is Definition 3.7 applied to the matrix with entries cast to R\mathbb RR; it is not Mathlib's Matrix.IsIrreducible, which differs on 1×11\times11×1 matrices.
  • Pinned readings: Definition 3.1 and Definition 4.1 use k≥1k\ge1k≥1; Definition 3.11 uses k≥0k\ge0k≥0; Proposition 3.5, Theorem 4.3 and Theorem 5.1 are stated for k>0k>0k>0 (Proposition 3.5 is false at k=0k=0k=0 when ya=yb∈Cty_a=y_b\in C_tya​=yb​∈Ct​); Remark 3 holds for all k≥0k\ge0k≥0. "Avoiding CsC_sCs​" in Theorem 5.1 means that no state x(i)x(i)x(i), i=1−μ,…,ki=1-\mu,\dots,ki=1−μ,…,k, lies in CsC_sCs​, which is the theorem's own middle term N1(k;a,b,ΞCs)\mathbb N_1(k;a,b,\Xi^{C_s})N1​(k;a,b,ΞCs​). Ξμp\Xi^p_\muΞμp​ is defined semantically by eq. (4.3), since the printed index range in (4.4) is a misprint. Lemma 3.9 is included in corrected form with N≥2N\ge2N≥2.

Controllability is defined through the dynamics and control sequences, never as positivity of entries of powers of QQQ; a formalization that defines reachability by (Qk)b,a>0(Q^k)_{b,a}>0(Qk)b,a​>0 would reduce Theorems 3.10 and 3.12 to library facts and is ruled out.

Needed infrastructure: the correspondence between control sequences and products of entries of QQQ (the core of Proposition 3.5), and the equivalence of Definition 3.7 with strong connectivity of the support graph for nonnegative matrices (Mathlib's Matrix.IsIrreducible, Matrix.isIrreducible_iff_exists_pow_pos and Matrix.pow_apply_pos_iff_nonempty_path cover much of the second part for sizes at least 2). Both are reusable beyond this mission, for ordinary BCNs, probabilistic BCNs and finite automata. Contributions of either piece, or of the semi-tensor-product bridge identifying QQQ with L⋉12mL\ltimes\mathbf 1_{2^m}L⋉12m​, are welcome.

Selected references

  • J. Lu, J. Zhong, D. W. C. Ho, Y. Tang, J. Cao, On Controllability of Delayed Boolean Control Networks, SIAM J. Control Optim. 54(2):475–494, 2016. https://doi.org/10.1137/140991820
  • D. Cheng, H. Qi, Controllability and observability of Boolean control networks, Automatica 45(7):1659–1667, 2009. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.automatica.2009.03.006
  • S. A. Kauffman, Metabolic stability and epigenesis in randomly constructed genetic nets, J. Theoret. Biol. 22(3):437–467, 1969. https://doi.org/10.1016/0022-5193(69)90015-0
  • A. Berman, R. J. Plemmons, Nonnegative Matrices in the Mathematical Sciences, SIAM Classics in Applied Mathematics 9, 1994. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611971262
9 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Group Theory·Captain: dbenbenn

Cannon–Floyd–Parry: Thompson's group F and the simplicity of its commutator subgroupTextbook

Motivation

This mission formalizes §4 of Cannon, Floyd and Parry's Introductory notes on Richard Thompson's groups, together with the definition of Thompson's group FFF from their §1. The goal is their Theorem 4.5: the commutator subgroup [F,F][F,F][F,F] is simple.

In the 1960s Richard Thompson defined three groups, now written FFF, TTT and VVV, whose properties have kept them in use ever since as a source of examples at the edge of what groups can do. FFF is the smallest of the three and the least understood. It is finitely presented (§3 of the source) and torsion-free, it has no free subgroup of rank two, and whether it is amenable — whether it carries a finitely additive left-invariant probability measure defined on all its subsets — is open. Cannon, Floyd and Parry record (§4, p. 227) that Geoghegan raised the question and conjectured in 1979 both that FFF contains no non-Abelian free subgroup and that FFF is not amenable.

That question is what makes FFF worth pinning down precisely. Write AGAGAG for the class of amenable discrete groups, EGEGEG for the elementary amenable ones, and NFNFNF for the groups with no free subgroup of rank two. That AG⊂NFAG \subset NFAG⊂NF was noted by Day and follows from von Neumann; whether it is strict is the von Neumann–Day problem. It is: Olshanskii proved AG≠NFAG \neq NFAG=NF in a 1984 ICM address and Gromov gave an independent proof — but by examples that are not finitely presented. Brin and Squier proved in 1985 that F∈NFF \in NFF∈NF, and FFF is not elementary amenable (Theorem 4.10 of the source, CannonFloydParry.not_elementaryAmenable_F). So FFF is a finitely presented group in AG∖EGAG \setminus EGAG∖EG if it is amenable and in NF∖AGNF \setminus AGNF∖AG if it is not — a question with no other finitely presented candidate.

Setting

Call a real number dyadic if it has the form m/2km/2^{k}m/2k with m∈Zm \in \mathbb{Z}m∈Z and k∈Nk \in \mathbb{N}k∈N.

Thompson's group FFF, as §1 of the source defines it, is the set of piecewise linear homeomorphisms of the closed unit interval [0,1][0,1][0,1] onto itself that are differentiable except at finitely many dyadic rationals, and whose derivatives, where they exist, are powers of 222. Since those derivatives are positive, every element preserves orientation, so the elements of FFF are increasing. Composition of two such maps is again one, and so is the inverse of one, so FFF is a group.

The formalization calls such a map piecewise linear over the dyadics, and defines FFF as the subgroup generated by those maps — so that closure under composition and inverses is a theorem rather than part of the construction, as the source has it. What the model fixes rather than derives is under Formalization scope below.

Two particular elements generate it. Write

A(x)={x/20≤x≤12x−1412≤x≤342x−134≤x≤1B(x)={x0≤x≤12x/2+1412≤x≤34x−1834≤x≤782x−178≤x≤1.A(x) = \begin{cases} x/2 & 0 \le x \le \tfrac12\\ x - \tfrac14 & \tfrac12 \le x \le \tfrac34\\ 2x-1 & \tfrac34 \le x \le 1\end{cases} \qquad B(x) = \begin{cases} x & 0 \le x \le \tfrac12 \\ x/2 + \tfrac14 & \tfrac12 \le x \le \tfrac34 \\ x - \tfrac18 & \tfrac34 \le x \le \tfrac78 \\ 2x-1 & \tfrac78 \le x \le 1.\end{cases}A(x)=⎩⎨⎧​x/2x−41​2x−1​0≤x≤21​21​≤x≤43​43​≤x≤1​B(x)=⎩⎨⎧​xx/2+41​x−81​2x−1​0≤x≤21​21​≤x≤43​43​≤x≤87​87​≤x≤1.​

An element of FFF is trivial near 000 if it fixes every point of some interval [0,ε)[0,\varepsilon)[0,ε), and trivial near 111 if it fixes every point of some (1−ε,1](1-\varepsilon, 1](1−ε,1]. The support of fff is the set of points of [0,1][0,1][0,1] that fff moves. The commutator convention throughout is [x,y]=xyx−1y−1[x,y] = xyx^{-1}y^{-1}[x,y]=xyx−1y−1, and [F,F][F,F][F,F] denotes the commutator subgroup.

Formalization targets

Goal

[F,F] is a simple group.[F,F] \ \text{is a simple group.}[F,F] is a simple group.

This is the capstone of §4: it says the commutator subgroup has no normal subgroup other than itself and the trivial one. It is the goal because the rest of the section feeds it — both halves of Theorem 4.1, Theorem 4.3, and both supporting lemmas below are consumed by its proof.

Theorem 4.1, which has two parts

[F,F]  =  { f∈F:f is trivial near 0 and near 1 }[F,F] \;=\; \{\, f \in F : f \text{ is trivial near } 0 \text{ and near } 1 \,\}[F,F]={f∈F:f is trivial near 0 and near 1} F/[F,F]  ≅  Z⊕ZF/[F,F] \;\cong\; \mathbb{Z} \oplus \mathbb{Z}F/[F,F]≅Z⊕Z

Theorem 4.3

N⊴F, N≠1  ⟹  F/N is AbelianN \trianglelefteq F,\ N \neq 1 \;\Longrightarrow\; F/N \text{ is Abelian}N⊴F, N=1⟹F/N is Abelian

So FFF has no interesting proper quotients at all. With the first part of Theorem 4.1 this forces every nontrivial normal subgroup of FFF to contain [F,F][F,F][F,F].

Supporting results

That the piecewise-linear maps are already closed under composition and inverses, so that FFF consists of exactly those maps; a transitivity lemma on dyadic partitions of [0,1][0,1][0,1]; the fact that the subgroup of elements supported in a dyadic interval [a,b][a,b][a,b] of dyadic length is isomorphic to FFF itself; triviality of the center; that FFF contains no non-Abelian free group; and that FFF admits a total order invariant under multiplication on both sides.

Significance

What the results give. Theorem 4.1 identifies [F,F][F,F][F,F] concretely — a subgroup defined by a global algebraic condition turns out to be cut out by local behavior at the two endpoints — and computes the abelianization, making the pair of endpoint slopes a complete invariant of FFF modulo commutators. Theorem 4.3 and the simplicity of [F,F][F,F][F,F] together determine the whole normal subgroup lattice: every normal subgroup of FFF is trivial or contains [F,F][F,F][F,F]. That lattice is the input to the elementary-amenability argument.

What formalizing adds. All of these are proved in the source; none is in Mathlib, which has no piecewise-linear homeomorphism API and no Thompson group. Four of the milestones are proved as part of this proposal: that the piecewise-linear maps form a subgroup, that elements of FFF permute the dyadic rationals, that FFF embeds in the group Brin and Squier work with, and the absence of a free subgroup of rank two, which follows from the already-formalized Brin–Squier theorem via that embedding. The rest are open. The piecewise-linear machinery built along the way — local affineness, dyadic-breakpoint bookkeeping, extension by the identity — is reusable for TTT, for VVV, and for the wider family of piecewise-linear homeomorphism groups.

Difficulty

The obvious approach to the goal is to argue that a normal subgroup of [F,F][F,F][F,F] containing a nontrivial element must be everything, by conjugating that element around. It fails on its own: an element of [F,F][F,F][F,F] is pinned down only by being trivial near the two endpoints, and one still has to manufacture — inside [F,F][F,F][F,F], not merely inside FFF — an element carrying a prescribed pair of neighborhoods into those. That construction is what the dyadic-partition transitivity lemma supplies, and it is where the combinatorics of dyadic subdivision enters.

The second difficulty was that the source proves §4 using the tree-diagram normal form of §2. That section is now formalized in its own mission, Cannon–Floyd–Parry §2: tree diagrams and the normal form (mission ffd1e4ea-9f9a-4cb6-8419-78e70f2545e8), all of whose milestones are proved. Corollary 2.6 — milestone 5 here, the same theorem object — is closed from there, and Theorem 2.5 (represents_word_exponents) and the normal form (existsUnique_normalForm) are available to a solver attacking Theorem 4.3, so the source's argument can now be followed. A solution file imports only definitions, so whatever it uses from §2 must be reproved inline; the §2 solutions are public and written to be reused that way. The piecewise-linear route — dyadic-partition transitivity, Lemma 4.4 and Theorem 4.1 — remains an alternative, and is what Theorem 4.5's own argument uses.

Formalization scope

The unit interval is [0,1]⊆R[0,1] \subseteq \mathbb{R}[0,1]⊆R as a subtype, and an element of FFF is an order isomorphism of it, so orientation preservation is built into the representation rather than derived — faithful to the source's set, but assuming one sentence CFP prove. Piecewise linearity is stated as: there is a finite set BBB of dyadic reals such that the map is affine, with slope a power of two, on every closed interval whose interior misses BBB. Intercepts are not required to be dyadic — that is derived by induction along the breakpoints, not part of the definition.

The definition is not vacuous: AAA and BBB of Example 1.1 are constructed explicitly, and that FFF is not the trivial group is one of the milestones below — so no statement here is satisfied by the trivial group. In particular the goal, which asserts simplicity and therefore nontriviality, is not trivially false.

A companion definition places the same data on the real line, each element extended by the identity outside [0,1][0,1][0,1]; that line realisation is what the bridge statement connects to Brin and Squier's group.

Selected references

  • J. W. Cannon, W. J. Floyd, W. R. Parry, Introductory notes on Richard Thompson's groups, L'Enseignement Mathématique (2) 42 (1996), 215–256. doi:10.5169/seals-87877
  • M. G. Brin, C. C. Squier, Groups of piecewise linear homeomorphisms of the real line, Inventiones Mathematicae 79 (1985), 485–498. doi:10.1007/BF01388519
  • C. Chou, Elementary amenable groups, Illinois Journal of Mathematics 24 (1980), 396–407. doi:10.1215/ijm/1256047608
  • M. M. Day, Amenable semigroups, Illinois Journal of Mathematics 1 (1957), 509–544. doi:10.1215/ijm/1255380675
  • J. von Neumann, Zur allgemeinen Theorie des Maßes, Fundamenta Mathematicae 13 (1929), 73–116. doi:10.4064/fm-13-1-73-116
  • A. Yu. Olshanskii, On a geometric method in the combinatorial group theory, Proceedings of the International Congress of Mathematicians (Warsaw, 1983), vol. 1, 1984, pp. 415–424. IMU archive
  • M. Gromov, Hyperbolic groups, in Essays in Group Theory (S. M. Gersten, ed.), MSRI Publications 8, Springer, 1987, pp. 75–263. doi:10.1007/978-1-4613-9586-7_3
34 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Algorithmic Game TheoryEconomics·Captain: mikedeng1

Network Externalities and Market Dominance: Under In/Out Demand the Impulse Selects the Introspective Equilibrium by Its Position Relative to the Middle EquilibriumResearch Paper

Motivation

Markets with network externalities can support several levels of adoption at the same price. A consumer's willingness to buy may rise when many other consumers buy, while the ordinary price effect still works in the opposite direction. A price and an aggregate demand curve can therefore identify several self-consistent quantities without identifying which one consumers reach. In Network Externalities and Market Dominance, Akerlof, Holden and Rayo study this selection problem before analyzing firms' pricing decisions (accepted manuscript, §2.1).

The paper uses an introspective equilibrium: consumers begin with an impulse about firm 1's sales and repeatedly revise consumption in response to the previous level. The resulting limit gives a selection rule tied to an observable starting condition rather than to an arbitrary choice among fixed points. The mission formalizes Proposition 1 of the accepted manuscript, dated September 16, 2022. Its source is the repository manuscript; the numbering and printed pages here refer to that artifact, not the journal typesetting (Akerlof, Holden and Rayo, Proposition 1, p. 10).

Setting

There is a unit mass of consumers, each with unit demand. Write p=p1−p2p=p_1-p_2p=p1​−p2​ for firm 1's relative price, and let Q∈[0,1]Q\in[0,1]Q∈[0,1] be its current total sales. The aggregate demand D(p,Q)∈[0,1]D(p,Q)\in[0,1]D(p,Q)∈[0,1] is the quantity that would be demanded at price ppp if consumers believed sales were QQQ. With one firm, the paper sets the second firm's price and quantity to zero, so the same two-argument demand map applies. With two firms, ppp is the difference of their prices. An equilibrium quantity is a feasible fixed point,

Q=D(p,Q).Q=D(p,Q).Q=D(p,Q).

The inverse demand curve PPP gives a price at which a given quantity is self-consistent: D(P(Q),Q)=QD(P(Q),Q)=QD(P(Q),Q)=Q for Q∈[0,1]Q\in[0,1]Q∈[0,1]. The market assumptions say demand is continuous in price and feasible quantity, decreases with price, and increases with believed quantity. The formal market records weak monotonicity together with strict price comparisons at an inverse-demand point on the nonsaturated part of the range. These comparisons give the signs used in the paper's footnote 12 (§2, p. 5; footnote 12, p. 10).

An In/Out curve has two quantity thresholds 0<QL<QH<10<Q_L<Q_H<10<QL​<QH​<1. The curve PPP is strictly decreasing and convex on [0,QL][0,Q_L][0,QL​], strictly increasing on [QL,QH][Q_L,Q_H][QL​,QH​], and strictly decreasing and concave on [QH,1][Q_H,1][QH​,1]; convexity and concavity here are weak. Define pmin⁡=P(QL)p_{\min}=P(Q_L)pmin​=P(QL​) and pmax⁡=P(QH)p_{\max}=P(Q_H)pmax​=P(QH​). The endpoint conditions are pmax⁡<P(0)p_{\max}<P(0)pmax​<P(0) and P(1)<pmin⁡P(1)<p_{\min}P(1)<pmin​. At a price between the thresholds, the intersections of P(Q)=pP(Q)=pP(Q)=p with the three branches are Qout(p)Q^{\mathrm{out}}(p)Qout(p), Qmid(p)Q^{\mathrm{mid}}(p)Qmid(p), and Qin(p)Q^{\mathrm{in}}(p)Qin(p). At either threshold price, two adjacent branch labels can name the same quantity (footnote 7, p. 6; §2.1, p. 8).

The consumers' impulse I0I_0I0​ lies in [0,1][0,1][0,1]. Level-kkk consumption is the actual iteration Ik=D(p,Ik−1)I_k=D(p,I_{k-1})Ik​=D(p,Ik−1​), or Ik=D(p,⋅)∘k(I0)I_k=D(p,\cdot)^{\circ k}(I_0)Ik​=D(p,⋅)∘k(I0​) with I0I_0I0​ at level zero. An introspective equilibrium Q1∗Q_1^*Q1∗​ is the limit of this sequence as k→∞k\to\inftyk→∞ (Definition 1, p. 9).

Formalization targets

Equilibrium structure

For pmin⁡<p<pmax⁡p_{\min}<p<p_{\max}pmin​<p<pmax​, the three branch quantities are distinct and exhaust the feasible equilibrium quantities. At p=pmin⁡p=p_{\min}p=pmin​ or p=pmax⁡p=p_{\max}p=pmax​, two distinct quantities remain. The milestone from §2.1 also records uniqueness within each branch. Footnote 12 records where D(p,Q)D(p,Q)D(p,Q) lies above or below QQQ between these intersections (§2.1, p. 8; footnote 12, p. 10).

Selection rule

The goal is the full two-part Proposition 1. When pmin⁡≤p≤pmax⁡p_{\min}\le p\le p_{\max}pmin​≤p≤pmax​, the branch equilibria exist and

Q1∗(p)={Qin(p),I0>Qmid(p),Qmid(p),I0=Qmid(p),Qout(p),I0<Qmid(p).Q_1^*(p)= \begin{cases} Q^{\mathrm{in}}(p),&I_0>Q^{\mathrm{mid}}(p),\\ Q^{\mathrm{mid}}(p),&I_0=Q^{\mathrm{mid}}(p),\\ Q^{\mathrm{out}}(p),&I_0<Q^{\mathrm{mid}}(p). \end{cases}Q1∗​(p)=⎩⎨⎧​Qin(p),Qmid(p),Qout(p),​I0​>Qmid(p),I0​=Qmid(p),I0​<Qmid(p).​

When p>pmax⁡p>p_{\max}p>pmax​ or p<pmin⁡p<p_{\min}p<pmin​, exactly one feasible quantity solves Q=D(p,Q)Q=D(p,Q)Q=D(p,Q), and IkI_kIk​ converges to it for every I0∈[0,1]I_0\in[0,1]I0​∈[0,1]. The proof's convergence and uniqueness passages are separate milestones, so the goal retains both claims without taking either as an extra assumption (Proposition 1 and proof, p. 10).

Significance

Proposition 1 ties a market's adoption outcome to the initial impulse. In the multiple-equilibrium price range, the middle equilibrium separates impulses that select the low and high quantities; outside that range, the selected quantity is independent of the impulse. This makes the refinement usable when the subsequent economic analysis asks how a price or a change in expectations can move the market between dominant firms (§2.1–§3).

The paper proves the result in ordinary mathematics. The remaining work here is a machine-checked proof of its precise selection statement and of the source passages that support it. The definition layer also supplies a reusable interface for continuous aggregate demand and inverse demand on a bounded quantity interval. There is no claim that this paper's later pricing-game propositions have already been formalized.

Difficulty

The inverse-demand picture shows three crossings, but a picture alone does not establish that every branch crossing exists or that no additional feasible fixed point is present. At a threshold, two branch labels meet, so a claim that always demands three distinct quantities would be false. Outside the threshold interval, the paper's reference to a unique intersection of P(Q)=pP(Q)=pP(Q)=p fails at prices beyond P(0)P(0)P(0) or P(1)P(1)P(1): the equilibrium can instead be a saturated fixed point at 000 or 111. The formal statements must cover those prices with D(p,Q)=QD(p,Q)=QD(p,Q)=Q (Proposition 1 and proof, p. 10).

The convergence claim concerns a specific recursive sequence from every allowed impulse. Fixed-point existence by itself does not identify that limit or its dependence on the impulse. The market assumptions also require care at the saturation endpoints: strict decrease in price on the whole real line would conflict with nonnegative demand at Q=0Q=0Q=0, while merely weak decrease permits extra fixed points that would defeat the selection claim.

Formalization scope

Lean represents prices and quantities by real numbers and restricts feasible quantities and impulses to [0,1][0,1][0,1]. A Market stores DDD, PPP, continuity of DDD on real prices and feasible quantities, range bounds, weak monotonicity in quantity and price, the inverse-demand identity, and the strict nonsaturation signs from footnote 12. The paper says demand is strictly increasing in quantity below 111; the formal interface uses weak increase because its own saturated consumer model can have a constant zero-demand segment. The strict price signs make explicit the stronger reading of “decreasing” needed at inverse-demand points. Both choices are disclosed in the setting item. The polynomial and clamped-demand example in the local verification file witnesses that the assumptions are consistent.

IsInOut retains every monotonicity, convexity, concavity, threshold-order, and endpoint condition of footnote 7, even when a clause is unused in a proof. The branch quantities are predicates that include their intervals and the equation P(Q)=pP(Q)=pP(Q)=p; the goal asserts their existence before quantifying over them. IsIntrospectiveEq uses Function.iterate and Tendsto for the prescribed IkI_kIk​, so it cannot be satisfied by selecting an unrelated fixed point or sequence. Outside the threshold interval, uniqueness is over feasible fixed points of DDD, including 000 and 111. The assumptions apply to the aggregate map for either one or two firms; consumer types, their distribution, the micro-foundations, the firms' pricing game, profits, the WIN constraint, Corollary 1, and later sections are outside this mission.

A complete development needs continuity and intermediate-value results, monotonicity and convexity of real functions on intervals, and convergence of bounded sequences of real numbers. The market and level-kkk definitions can be reused by later work on equilibrium selection. Contributions may prove the listed milestones, supply independent proofs of Proposition 1, or build the interval-dynamics lemmas they require, while retaining the statement's full price and impulse domains.

Selected references

  • R. Akerlof, R. Holden and L. Rayo, Network Externalities and Market Dominance, author's accepted manuscript, WRAP 178238, dated September 16, 2022; published in Management Science (2024). Accepted manuscript; DOI.
7 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
EconomicsOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Minimum Earnings Regulation and the Stability of Marketplaces II: Without Subsidies a Utilization Shock u₀ Can Be Absorbed Exactly When u₀ ≥ M/J(C(M))Research Paper

Motivation

In 2018 New York City's Taxi and Limousine Commission adopted a minimum earnings rule for ride-hailing drivers: each platform must pay drivers, per hour spent with a passenger, at least a target hourly earnings level divided by the platform's measured driver utilization in the previous period. The rule ties next period's wage floor to this period's idle time, so a platform that over-recruits drivers must raise wages. Asadpour, Lobel and van Ryzin (SSRN 3502607, published in Manufacturing & Service Operations Management, 2022) model this rule as a dynamical system and ask when the regulated marketplace can stay stable, meaning wages stay bounded while the platform does not lose money.

Their main result (Theorem 1, a separate mission of this series) characterizes stability in a deterministic market. Real markets are hit by demand shocks: a sudden drop in ride requests lowers utilization in one period, and the rule then forces a high wage in the next. This mission formalizes the paper's answer (Theorem 2, §4.1) to whether a platform that may not subsidize rides can absorb such a one-time shock.

Setting

Time is discrete. In each period ttt the platform chooses a price pt≥0p_t \ge 0pt​≥0 per ride hour and a wage wt≥0w_t \ge 0wt​≥0 per ride hour. The demand D(p)D(p)D(p) is the number of ride hours requested at price ppp; the supply S(z)S(z)S(z) is the number of driver hours offered when drivers earn zzz per hour. Rides served are Q(p,z)=min⁡{D(p),S(z)}Q(p,z) = \min\{D(p), S(z)\}Q(p,z)=min{D(p),S(z)}, the utilization is u(p,z)=Q(p,z)/S(z)u(p,z) = Q(p,z)/S(z)u(p,z)=Q(p,z)/S(z), and drivers' hourly earnings ztz_tzt​ solve the equilibrium condition

zt=wt u(pt,zt).z_t = w_t \, u(p_t, z_t).zt​=wt​u(pt​,zt​).

A price, wage and earnings sequence satisfying this in every period is an equilibrium-augmented policy. The platform's profit is π(p,w,z)=(p−w) Q(p,z)\pi(p,w,z) = (p-w)\,Q(p,z)π(p,w,z)=(p−w)Q(p,z). With target M>0M > 0M>0, the minimum earnings rule requires

wt+1≥Mu(pt,zt)in every period.w_{t+1} \ge \frac{M}{u(p_t, z_t)} \quad \text{in every period.}wt+1​≥u(pt​,zt​)M​in every period.

The revenue and cost functions are R(p)=p D(p)R(p) = p\,D(p)R(p)=pD(p) and C(z)=z S(z)C(z) = z\,S(z)C(z)=zS(z). The paper assumes DDD positive, strictly decreasing and continuous; SSS strictly increasing, continuous, and positive and differentiable away from 000; RRR unimodal with maximum at p∗p^*p∗; and demand and supply crossing at w∗w^*w∗, D(w∗)=S(w∗)D(w^*) = S(w^*)D(w∗)=S(w∗). HHH is the inverse of CCC, and JJJ is the inverse of RRR on its decreasing branch: J(r)=pJ(r) = pJ(r)=p iff p≥p∗p \ge p^*p≥p∗ and R(p)=rR(p) = rR(p)=r.

A shock lowers utilization to u0u_0u0​ in one period. A marketplace absorbs a u0u_0u0​ utilization shock (Definition 3) if some feasible equilibrium-augmented policy obeying the rule, with first post-shock wage w1≥M/u0w_1 \ge M/u_0w1​≥M/u0​, has bounded wages and non-negative profit in every period.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2

the marketplace absorbs a u0 utilization shock  ⟺  u0≥MJ(C(M)).\text{the marketplace absorbs a } u_0 \text{ utilization shock} \iff u_0 \ge \frac{M}{J(C(M))}.the marketplace absorbs a u0​ utilization shock⟺u0​≥J(C(M))M​.

The threshold is explicit in the model primitives; no constant is chosen by the formalization.

Milestones (the steps of the published proof, Online Appendix p. 5)

  1. If u0<M/J(C(M))u_0 < M/J(C(M))u0​<M/J(C(M)) and w1≥M/u0w_1 \ge M/u_0w1​≥M/u0​, then M/H(R(w1))≥ϕ(M,u0)>1M/H(R(w_1)) \ge \phi(M,u_0) > 1M/H(R(w1​))≥ϕ(M,u0​)>1, where ϕ(M,u0)=M/H(R(M/u0))\phi(M,u_0) = M/H(R(M/u_0))ϕ(M,u0​)=M/H(R(M/u0​)).
  2. Along a policy with p=wp = wp=w after such a shock, wt+1≥ϕ(M,u0) wtw_{t+1} \ge \phi(M,u_0)\,w_twt+1​≥ϕ(M,u0​)wt​, hence wt≥ϕ(M,u0)t−1w1w_t \ge \phi(M,u_0)^{t-1} w_1wt​≥ϕ(M,u0​)t−1w1​.
  3. If u0≥M/J(C(M))u_0 \ge M/J(C(M))u0​≥M/J(C(M)), then at p=w=J(C(M))p = w = J(C(M))p=w=J(C(M)) and z=Mz = Mz=M: z/w=D(p)/S(z)=u(p,z)z/w = D(p)/S(z) = u(p,z)z/w=D(p)/S(z)=u(p,z), so z=Mz = Mz=M is an equilibrium.

Significance

The result. Theorem 2 quantifies the fragility of a regulated marketplace whose platform cannot cross-subsidize: there is a sharp utilization level below which a single shock sends wages into unbounded growth, and above which the platform recovers immediately with a zero-profit stationary policy. Its threshold depends on the market only through the decreasing branch of revenue and the cost of paying MMM, which makes it a concrete design criterion for the target MMM: a regulator choosing MMM also chooses how deep a utilization drop the market can survive. The remark after the theorem (p. 14) relates it to the stability threshold of Theorem 1.

Formalizing it. The result is proved in the paper; no machine-checked version exists. A formal proof must close points the published argument leaves implicit: the reduction to p=wp = wp=w policies (the paper's Lemma 3, posed in mission I) must hold in the all-periods form used here; the wage recursion of Lemma 4 needs wages above w∗w^*w∗, which the proof does not check; and the sufficiency policy needs J(C(M))≥MJ(C(M)) \ge MJ(C(M))≥M, which holds only because utilizations are at most one. The mission also gives the platform a second, independent use of the shared marketplace model.

Difficulty

The sufficiency direction is a direct check of one stationary policy. The necessity direction is where the work lies. The natural attempt, to argue that a high first wage simply cannot be paid without loss, fails: profit only requires pt≥wtp_t \ge w_tpt​≥wt​, and a platform may raise its price along with the wage. The obstruction is dynamic. Raising the price above J(C(M))J(C(M))J(C(M)) lowers revenue below the cost of supplying earnings MMM, so equilibrium earnings fall below MMM, utilization falls, and the rule raises the next wage by a factor bounded away from one. Turning this into a proof requires controlling arbitrary policies with pt≥wtp_t \ge w_tpt​≥wt​, not just the convenient p=wp = wp=w, and carrying an induction hypothesis (wages stay above M/u0M/u_0M/u0​) that the paper does not state.

Formalization scope

The Lean development lives in namespace MinEarnings.Shock. Demand and supply are functions D S : ℝ → ℝ; all regularity is required on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), and "differentiable" is read as differentiable on (0,∞)(0,\infty)(0,∞), which is all the argument uses. "RRR unimodal with maximum at p∗p^*p∗" is strict increase on [0,p∗][0,p^*][0,p∗] and strict decrease on [p∗,∞)[p^*,\infty)[p∗,∞). The points p∗p^*p∗, w∗w^*w∗ and the inverse cost HHH are parameters carrying their defining properties. Time is 0-based: Lean's period 000 is the paper's period 111, so the shock constraint w1≥M/u0w_1 \ge M/u_0w1​≥M/u0​ is a bound on Lean's first wage and the rule constrains every later wage. Bounded wages means ∃B ∀t, wt≤B\exists B\ \forall t,\ w_t \le B∃B ∀t, wt​≤B, and profit is non-negative in every period.

Three conventions are pinned and disclosed in every statement:

  • J(C(M))J(C(M))J(C(M)) is not defined as a function. It is passed as a price qqq with q≥p∗q \ge p^*q≥p∗ and R(q)=C(M)R(q) = C(M)R(q)=C(M), which determines it uniquely. The paper's JJJ is defined on (0,R(p∗)](0, R(p^*)](0,R(p∗)], which presumes R(p)→0R(p) \to 0R(p)→0, an assumption the paper does not make.
  • The shock utilization satisfies 0<u0≤10 < u_0 \le 10<u0​≤1. Without u0≤1u_0 \le 1u0​≤1, which Definition 3 leaves implicit, the sufficiency direction fails when p∗≤w∗<Mp^* \le w^* < Mp∗≤w∗<M.
  • Equilibrium earnings are positive, zt>0z_t > 0zt​>0. Lean defines 0/0=00/0 = 00/0=0, so a zero-earnings "equilibrium" with S(0)=0S(0) = 0S(0)=0 would have utilization 000 and turn the rule into M/0=0≤wt+1M/0 = 0 \le w_{t+1}M/0=0≤wt+1​; the positivity requirement rules out this trivializing reading, and the requirement that wages be bounded uniformly rules out a vacuous reading of stability.

The development needs only Mathlib's real analysis: monotonicity on intervals, inverse functions on (0,∞)(0,\infty)(0,∞), and geometric growth of sequences. The setting file is shared, up to namespace, with the other two missions of the series. Contributions welcome: proofs of the milestones, a proof of the all-periods reduction to p=wp = wp=w policies, and a general lemma that a sequence with wt+1≥ϕwtw_{t+1} \ge \phi w_twt+1​≥ϕwt​, ϕ>1\phi > 1ϕ>1, w0>0w_0 > 0w0​>0 is unbounded.

Selected references

  • A. Asadpour, I. Lobel, G. van Ryzin, Minimum Earnings Regulation and the Stability of Marketplaces, SSRN 3502607 (version of August 24, 2022); Manufacturing & Service Operations Management, 2022. https://ssrn.com/abstract=3502607 · https://doi.org/10.1287/msom.2022.1150
6 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
EconomicsOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Minimum Earnings Regulation and the Stability of Marketplaces III: A Minimum Earnings Marketplace Is Dynamically Stable Exactly When It Is Statically StableResearch Paper

Utilization-based minimum earnings rules

In 2018 New York City's Taxi and Limousine Commission (TLC) imposed a minimum pay formula on the largest ride-hailing platforms, following a proposal by Parrott and Reich (2018): the pay per minute and per mile driven is divided by the platform's utilization rate, the fraction of drivers' working time spent carrying passengers. Seattle adopted a similar rule in 2020. The rule targets drivers' hourly earnings while leaving them free to choose when and how much to work. Because utilization is only observed after the fact, the regulation computes the floor for the next measurement period (six months in New York) from the utilization of the current one.

Asadpour, Lobel and van Ryzin (2022) model this rule as a dynamic system and ask when a platform can comply with it while keeping wages bounded and profits non-negative. This mission formalizes their Theorem 3: the lag in the rule does not matter for stability, because the dynamic system is stable exactly when a single static system of equations has a solution. Two companion missions of the series formalize Theorem 1 (the threshold z∗z^*z∗ on stable earnings targets) and Theorem 2 (absorption of a utilization shock).

Setting

Time is discrete. In period ttt the platform charges riders a price pt≥0p_t \ge 0pt​≥0 per hour of driving and pays drivers a wage wt≥0w_t \ge 0wt​≥0 per hour of driving riders. A demand function DDD gives the ride hours demanded at price ppp, and a supply function SSS gives the driver hours offered at expected hourly earnings zzz. The regularity assumptions are that DDD is positive, strictly decreasing and continuous, and SSS is strictly increasing, continuous, and positive and differentiable away from zero. The ride hours produced, the utilization and the platform's profit are

Q(p,z)=min⁡{D(p),S(z)},u(p,z)=Q(p,z)S(z),π(p,w,z)=(p−w) Q(p,z).Q(p,z)=\min\{D(p),S(z)\},\qquad u(p,z)=\frac{Q(p,z)}{S(z)},\qquad \pi(p,w,z)=(p-w)\,Q(p,z).Q(p,z)=min{D(p),S(z)},u(p,z)=S(z)Q(p,z)​,π(p,w,z)=(p−w)Q(p,z).

Drivers earn wtw_twt​ only while busy, so earnings satisfy the equilibrium condition zt=wt u(pt,zt)z_t = w_t\,u(p_t,z_t)zt​=wt​u(pt​,zt​). The minimum earnings rule with target M>0M>0M>0 is

wt+1 ≥ Mu(pt,zt)for every period t.w_{t+1}\ \ge\ \frac{M}{u(p_t,z_t)}\qquad\text{for every period } t.wt+1​ ≥ u(pt​,zt​)M​for every period t.

The MMM-minimum-earnings marketplace is stable if some policy (pt,wt,zt)(p_t,w_t,z_t)(pt​,wt​,zt​) that is feasible, satisfies the equilibrium condition and obeys the rule has a bounded wage sequence and π(pt,wt,zt)≥0\pi(p_t,w_t,z_t)\ge 0π(pt​,wt​,zt​)≥0 in all but finitely many periods. It is statically stable if there are p,w,z≥0p,w,z\ge 0p,w,z≥0 and u∈(0,1]u\in(0,1]u∈(0,1] with

u=Q(p,z)S(z),z=w u,w≥Mu,p≥w.(8)u=\frac{Q(p,z)}{S(z)},\qquad z=w\,u,\qquad w\ge\frac{M}{u},\qquad p\ge w. \tag{8}u=S(z)Q(p,z)​,z=wu,w≥uM​,p≥w.(8)

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3

the M-minimum-earnings marketplace is stable  ⟺  it is statically stable.\text{the } M\text{-minimum-earnings marketplace is stable}\iff\text{it is statically stable}.the M-minimum-earnings marketplace is stable⟺it is statically stable.

The statement carries only the regularity assumptions on DDD and SSS and M>0M>0M>0.

Milestones

The milestones follow the proof in the Online Appendix.

  1. A statically stable marketplace is stable.
  2. Along a policy with pt=wtp_t = w_tpt​=wt​ that satisfies the equilibrium condition and the rule, if ut+1≥utu_{t+1}\ge u_tut+1​≥ut​ for some ttt, the marketplace is statically stable.
  3. Along the same kind of policy, if wt≥M/utw_t\ge M/u_twt​≥M/ut​ for some ttt, the marketplace is statically stable.
  4. If neither case occurs and wages are bounded, then wt→ww_t\to wwt​→w and ut→uu_t\to uut​→u, and the limits satisfy 0<u≤10<u\le 10<u≤1, w≥M/uw\ge M/uw≥M/u and u=Q(w,wu)/S(wu)u = Q(w,wu)/S(wu)u=Q(w,wu)/S(wu).

Significance

Theorem 3 reduces a question about infinite sequences to a question about one system of four relations in four unknowns. The paper uses it to give a second proof of its threshold theorem, and it shows that the lag in the regulation cannot be blamed for instability: every earnings target that a real-time rule could sustain can also be sustained under the lagged rule, and conversely. This gives regulators and platforms a criterion that can be checked by solving equations rather than by simulating policies.

The result is proved in the paper. No machine-checked version of it or of the paper's other results exists. Formalizing it checks the passage to the limit in the dynamic-to-static direction, where the paper leaves one step implicit (the positivity of the limiting utilization), and it provides a Lean model of the regulated marketplace that the other two missions of the series share.

Difficulty

The static-to-dynamic direction is immediate. In the other direction, a stable policy is a sequence, and a solution of (8) is a single point. Fixing one period of a stable policy does not give such a point: the rule compares wt+1w_{t+1}wt+1​ with utu_tut​, while (8) compares www with the utilization of the same point. A solution has to be extracted either from a period where the comparison happens to go the right way or from a limit. The limit is delicate because the utilization Q(p,z)/S(z)Q(p,z)/S(z)Q(p,z)/S(z) is a ratio, and a limit with u=0u = 0u=0 would not solve (8). The positivity of the limiting utilization has to come from the rule and the bound on wages together. The reduction to policies with pt=wtp_t = w_tpt​=wt​ (Lemma 3 of the paper) also has to be carried out on the policy before the case analysis can start; that lemma is posed as a milestone of the first mission of this series and is not repeated here.

Formalization scope

Prices, wages and earnings are real numbers, and D,S:R→RD, S : \mathbb{R}\to\mathbb{R}D,S:R→R are constrained on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞). A policy is a triple of sequences indexed by N\mathbb{N}N starting at 000, so Lean's period ttt is the paper's period t+1t+1t+1, and the rule constrains every wage except the first. "Bounded" is an upper bound on the wages, which are non-negative; "all but finitely many periods" is an eventually-along-atTop statement. "Differentiable" is read as differentiability on (0,∞)(0,\infty)(0,∞) together with continuity on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞).

The equilibrium condition requires zt>0z_t>0zt​>0. Without it the encoding is trivial: if S(0)=0S(0)=0S(0)=0, which the assumptions allow, Lean evaluates u(p,0)=0/0u(p,0)=0/0u(p,0)=0/0 as 000, the rule becomes 0≤wt+10\le w_{t+1}0≤wt+1​, and every target MMM would count as stable. For the same reason Definition 4's u∈(0,1]u\in(0,1]u∈(0,1] is kept with its strict lower bound. The paper's standing assumptions that the revenue pD(p)pD(p)pD(p) is unimodal and that DDD and SSS cross are not used by Theorem 3 or its proof and are not assumed, so the formal statements are slightly more general than the paper's.

A complete development needs basic real analysis from Mathlib (monotone convergence, continuity of DDD, SSS and min⁡\minmin, limits of quotients) and the equilibrium construction behind Lemma 3, which uses the inverse of the cost function C(z)=zS(z)C(z)=zS(z)C(z)=zS(z). That construction is reusable across the series. Proofs of the milestones, of the p=wp=wp=w reduction, and of the goal are all welcome.

Selected references

  • A. Asadpour, I. Lobel, G. van Ryzin, Minimum Earnings Regulation and the Stability of Marketplaces, SSRN 3502607 (version of August 24, 2022); Theorem 3 on p. 15, proof in Online Appendix pp. 5–6. https://ssrn.com/abstract=3502607
  • A. Asadpour, I. Lobel, G. van Ryzin, Minimum Earnings Regulation and the Stability of Marketplaces, Manufacturing & Service Operations Management, 2022. https://doi.org/10.1287/msom.2022.1150
  • J. A. Parrott, M. Reich, An Earnings Standard for New York City's App-based Drivers: Economic Analysis and Policy Assessment, report for the New York City Taxi and Limousine Commission, 2018 (cited in the paper as Parrott and Reich [2018]).
7 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Linear algebra·Captain: Lucas

Dynamic Stochastic General Equilibrium I: The Taylor Principle and DeterminacyTextbook

Motivation

Dynamic stochastic general equilibrium (DSGE) models are the standard framework used by central banks and fiscal authorities for policy analysis and forecasting (Wikipedia overview). The models used for monetary-policy analysis are built from three interrelated blocks — demand, supply and a monetary-policy rule — that jointly determine output, inflation and the nominal interest rate. The canonical small-scale instance is the three-equation New Keynesian model (Woodford 2003; Galí 2008; Clarida, Galí and Gertler 1999).

A basic question about such a model is whether it pins down a unique equilibrium path at all. If many bounded paths solve the model, the model makes no definite prediction and expectations can become self-fulfilling. The answer for the three-equation model is the Taylor principle: the interest-rate rule must respond to inflation strongly enough.

Timeline. Blanchard and Kahn (1980) gave the eigenvalue-counting criterion for existence and uniqueness of bounded solutions of linear rational-expectations models. Kydland and Prescott (1982) started the real-business-cycle/DSGE programme. Rotemberg and Woodford (1997) introduced the New Keynesian DSGE framework. Bullard and Mitra (2002) derived the explicit determinacy condition κ(ϕπ−1)+(1−β)ϕy>0\kappa(\phi_\pi - 1) + (1-\beta)\phi_y > 0κ(ϕπ​−1)+(1−β)ϕy​>0 for the model with a contemporaneous Taylor rule, presented in textbook form by Galí (2008, Ch. 3).

Setting

Time is discrete, t=0,1,2,…t = 0, 1, 2, \dotst=0,1,2,…. All variables are deviations from the zero-inflation steady state: yty_tyt​ is the output gap, πt\pi_tπt​ inflation, and iti_tit​ the nominal interest rate. The parameters are σ>0\sigma > 0σ>0 (inverse elasticity of intertemporal substitution), β∈(0,1)\beta \in (0,1)β∈(0,1) (discount factor), κ>0\kappa > 0κ>0 (slope of the Phillips curve), and the policy coefficients ϕπ,ϕy≥0\phi_\pi, \phi_y \ge 0ϕπ​,ϕy​≥0.

A triple of real sequences (y,π,i)(y, \pi, i)(y,π,i) is an equilibrium if for every ttt

yt=yt+1−1σ(it−πt+1)(demand: dynamic IS curve)πt=βπt+1+κyt(supply: New Keynesian Phillips curve)it=ϕππt+ϕyyt(monetary policy: Taylor rule).\begin{aligned} y_t &= y_{t+1} - \tfrac{1}{\sigma}(i_t - \pi_{t+1}) && \text{(demand: dynamic IS curve)}\\ \pi_t &= \beta \pi_{t+1} + \kappa y_t && \text{(supply: New Keynesian Phillips curve)}\\ i_t &= \phi_\pi \pi_t + \phi_y y_t && \text{(monetary policy: Taylor rule).} \end{aligned}yt​πt​it​​=yt+1​−σ1​(it​−πt+1​)=βπt+1​+κyt​=ϕπ​πt​+ϕy​yt​​​(demand: dynamic IS curve)(supply: New Keynesian Phillips curve)(monetary policy: Taylor rule).​

The demand equation is the log-linearised consumption Euler equation, which equates marginal utility of consumption today with discounted marginal utility tomorrow. The model is determinate if the zero path is its only equilibrium in which yyy, π\piπ and iii all stay bounded.

Formalization targets

Goal: the Taylor principle

For σ>0\sigma > 0σ>0, 0<β<10 < \beta < 10<β<1, κ>0\kappa > 0κ>0, ϕπ,ϕy≥0\phi_\pi, \phi_y \ge 0ϕπ​,ϕy​≥0:

the model is determinate  ⟺  κ(ϕπ−1)+(1−β)ϕy>0.\text{the model is determinate} \iff \kappa(\phi_\pi - 1) + (1 - \beta)\phi_y > 0 .the model is determinate⟺κ(ϕπ​−1)+(1−β)ϕy​>0.

Milestones

  1. Consumption Euler equation. At an interior optimum of the two-period consumption–saving problem, u′(c0)=β(1+r)u′(c1)u'(c_0) = \beta(1+r)u'(c_1)u′(c0​)=β(1+r)u′(c1​).
  2. State-space form. For σ,β≠0\sigma, \beta \ne 0σ,β=0, the model is equivalent to (yt+1,πt+1)⊤=M(yt,πt)⊤(y_{t+1}, \pi_{t+1})^\top = M(y_t, \pi_t)^\top(yt+1​,πt+1​)⊤=M(yt​,πt​)⊤ together with the Taylor rule, for an explicit 2×22\times22×2 matrix MMM.
  3. Equilibria are parametrised by initial conditions. Each (y0,π0)(y_0, \pi_0)(y0​,π0​) determines exactly one equilibrium.
  4. Schur–Cohn test. For real TTT and D>0D > 0D>0, both roots of z2−Tz+Dz^2 - Tz + Dz2−Tz+D have modulus >1> 1>1 iff D>1D > 1D>1 and ∣T∣<1+D|T| < 1 + D∣T∣<1+D.
  5. Blanchard–Kahn lemma. For a real square matrix MMM, the only bounded solution of xt+1=Mxtx_{t+1} = Mx_txt+1​=Mxt​ is zero iff every complex eigenvalue of MMM has modulus >1> 1>1.

Significance

The result itself. The Taylor principle is the standard criterion for whether an interest-rate rule yields a well-defined equilibrium in New Keynesian models, and it is the first property checked when a policy rule is proposed. The determinacy region it describes is the starting point for the analysis of optimal policy and of learnability (Bullard and Mitra 2002).

Formalizing it. The result is classical and proved on paper. This mission formalizes the known argument. The mission produces a reusable Lean definition of the basic New Keynesian model, a general lemma on bounded orbits of linear recursions (which applies to any linear rational-expectations model with only forward-looking variables), and a formal Schur–Cohn criterion for real quadratics.

Difficulty

The economic content is elementary, but the obvious argument skips the hardest step. Textbook treatments state "determinacy holds iff both eigenvalues lie outside the unit circle" without proof, and the equivalence between "no nonzero bounded solution" and an eigenvalue condition has to be established for real sequences while the eigenvalues may be complex. In particular the converse direction needs a real bounded solution built from a complex eigenvector, and the boundary case of eigenvalues on the unit circle must come out on the non-determinate side. The parameter translation also has to handle complex-conjugate eigenvalues, not only real ones.

Formalization scope

  • Sequences are functions N→R\mathbb N \to \mathbb RN→R; the model is the deterministic (shock-free) version, so there are no expectation operators. Stochastic shocks do not change the determinacy condition, but that extension is outside the scope of this mission.
  • "Bounded" means a single real bound for all ttt; determinacy requires yyy, π\piπ and iii to be bounded. Boundedness of iii follows from that of yyy and π\piπ, so this adds no restriction.
  • Division is Lean's total division; every statement that divides by σ\sigmaσ or β\betaβ assumes they are nonzero (or positive).
  • Eigenvalues are complex roots of the characteristic polynomial of the complexified matrix.
  • The goal is not trivial: the zero path is always an equilibrium, determinacy is a genuine uniqueness claim, and the parameter hypotheses are satisfiable (e.g. σ=1\sigma = 1σ=1, β=0.99\beta = 0.99β=0.99, κ=0.1\kappa = 0.1κ=0.1, ϕπ=1.5\phi_\pi = 1.5ϕπ​=1.5, ϕy=0.5\phi_y = 0.5ϕy​=0.5).
  • All declarations live in the namespace DSGE. Contributions of general linear-recursion and polynomial-root lemmas are welcome.

Selected references

  • Wikipedia, Dynamic stochastic general equilibrium. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dynamic_stochastic_general_equilibrium
  • O. J. Blanchard and C. M. Kahn, The Solution of Linear Difference Models under Rational Expectations, Econometrica 48(5), 1980. https://doi.org/10.2307/1912186
  • F. E. Kydland and E. C. Prescott, Time to Build and Aggregate Fluctuations, Econometrica 50(6), 1982. https://doi.org/10.2307/1913386
  • R. Clarida, J. Galí and M. Gertler, The Science of Monetary Policy: A New Keynesian Perspective, Journal of Economic Literature 37(4), 1999. https://doi.org/10.1257/jel.37.4.1661
  • J. Bullard and K. Mitra, Learning about Monetary Policy Rules, Journal of Monetary Economics 49(6), 2002. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0304-3932(02)00144-7
  • M. Woodford, Interest and Prices: Foundations of a Theory of Monetary Policy, Princeton University Press, 2003.
  • J. Galí, Monetary Policy, Inflation, and the Business Cycle, Princeton University Press, 2008 (Chapter 3).
7 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Understanding the Acceleration Phenomenon via High-Resolution Differential Equations V: Along the High-Resolution ODE of NAG-C, inf ‖∇f(X(u))‖² ≤ (12 + 9sL)‖x₀ − x⋆‖²/(2√s(t³ − t₀³))Research Paper

Motivation

Nesterov's accelerated gradient method for smooth convex functions, called NAG-C in the source paper, minimizes an LLL-smooth convex function fff with function values decreasing at the rate O(L/k2)O(L/k^2)O(L/k2). That rate is optimal among first-order methods (Nesterov, 1983). A line of work starting with Su, Boyd & Candès (2016) studies such methods through ordinary differential equations obtained in the limit of vanishing step size. Their low-resolution ODE X¨+3tX˙+∇f(X)=0\ddot X+\frac3t\dot X+\nabla f(X)=0X¨+t3​X˙+∇f(X)=0 reproduces the O(1/t2)O(1/t^2)O(1/t2) function-value rate. The same ODE also models the heavy-ball method, so it cannot explain why Nesterov's method behaves differently from heavy-ball.

Shi, Du, Jordan & Su (arXiv:1810.08907v3) keep the O(s)O(\sqrt s)O(s​) terms of the limit, where sss is the step size. The resulting high-resolution ODEs contain a gradient-correction term s ∇2f(X)X˙\sqrt s\,\nabla^2 f(X)\dot Xs​∇2f(X)X˙, which is absent from the heavy-ball ODE. This mission formalizes the paper's analysis of the high-resolution ODE of NAG-C (Section 4.1, pp. 21–24). Along this ODE the smallest squared gradient norm up to time ttt decays like 1/t31/t^31/t3, while the low-resolution ODE gives only 1/t21/t^21/t2. Small gradients are the natural stopping criterion in practice and the natural target in nonconvex and dual problems, which is why the squared gradient norm is studied separately from function values (Nesterov, 2012).

Setting

Let f:Rn→Rf:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb Rf:Rn→R have gradient ∇f\nabla f∇f and Hessian ∇2f\nabla^2 f∇2f. For L>0L>0L>0, the class FL1(Rn)\mathcal F^1_L(\mathbb R^n)FL1​(Rn) consists of the differentiable fff with

f(y)≥f(x)+⟨∇f(x),y−x⟩,∥∇f(x)−∇f(y)∥≤L∥x−y∥(x,y∈Rn).f(y)\ge f(x)+\langle\nabla f(x),y-x\rangle,\qquad \|\nabla f(x)-\nabla f(y)\|\le L\|x-y\|\qquad(x,y\in\mathbb R^n).f(y)≥f(x)+⟨∇f(x),y−x⟩,∥∇f(x)−∇f(y)∥≤L∥x−y∥(x,y∈Rn).

The class FL2(Rn)\mathcal F^2_L(\mathbb R^n)FL2​(Rn) is its subclass of twice continuously differentiable functions whose Hessian is Lipschitz continuous. A minimizer x⋆x^\starx⋆ of fff is fixed.

Given a step size s>0s>0s>0, put t0=1.5st_0=1.5\sqrt st0​=1.5s​. The high-resolution ODE of NAG-C (1.12) is

X¨(t)+3tX˙(t)+s ∇2f(X(t))X˙(t)+(1+3s2t)∇f(X(t))=0(t≥t0),\ddot X(t)+\frac3t\dot X(t)+\sqrt s\,\nabla^2 f(X(t))\dot X(t)+\Big(1+\frac{3\sqrt s}{2t}\Big)\nabla f(X(t))=0\qquad(t\ge t_0),X¨(t)+t3​X˙(t)+s​∇2f(X(t))X˙(t)+(1+2t3s​​)∇f(X(t))=0(t≥t0​),

with X(t0)=x0X(t_0)=x_0X(t0​)=x0​ and X˙(t0)=−s ∇f(x0)\dot X(t_0)=-\sqrt s\,\nabla f(x_0)X˙(t0​)=−s​∇f(x0​). The analysis uses the Lyapunov function (4.1)

E(t)=t(t+s2)(f(X)−f(x⋆))+12∥tX˙+2(X−x⋆)+ts ∇f(X)∥2.\mathcal E(t)=t\Big(t+\frac{\sqrt s}{2}\Big)\big(f(X)-f(x^\star)\big)+\frac12\big\|t\dot X+2(X-x^\star)+t\sqrt s\,\nabla f(X)\big\|^2 .E(t)=t(t+2s​​)(f(X)−f(x⋆))+21​​tX˙+2(X−x⋆)+ts​∇f(X)​2.

With s=0s=0s=0 it reduces to the Lyapunov function of Su, Boyd and Candès.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5 (p. 21)

For every f∈FL2(Rn)f\in\mathcal F^2_L(\mathbb R^n)f∈FL2​(Rn), every step size s>0s>0s>0, and every solution XXX of (1.12),

inf⁡t0≤u≤t∥∇f(X(u))∥2≤(12+9sL) ∥x0−x⋆∥22s (t3−t03)for all t>t0.\inf_{t_0\le u\le t}\|\nabla f(X(u))\|^2\le\frac{(12+9sL)\,\|x_0-x^\star\|^2}{2\sqrt s\,(t^3-t_0^3)}\qquad\text{for all }t>t_0 .t0​≤u≤tinf​∥∇f(X(u))∥2≤2s​(t3−t03​)(12+9sL)∥x0​−x⋆∥2​for all t>t0​.

With s=1/Ls=1/Ls=1/L this is O(L/t3)O(\sqrt L/t^3)O(L​/t3). The infimum cannot be dropped, because the gradient norm need not decrease along the trajectory.

Milestones (pp. 22–23)

  1. The exact derivative of E\mathcal EE along (1.12) (first display of the proof of Lemma 4.1, p. 23).
  2. Lemma 4.1, (4.2): dEdt≤−[s t2+(1L+s2)t+s2L]∥∇f(X)∥2\frac{d\mathcal E}{dt}\le-\big[\sqrt s\,t^2+(\frac1L+\frac s2)t+\frac{\sqrt s}{2L}\big]\|\nabla f(X)\|^2dtdE​≤−[s​t2+(L1​+2s​)t+2Ls​​]∥∇f(X)∥2 for t≥t0t\ge t_0t≥t0​.
  3. The integrated form: ∫t0t[s u2+(1L+s2)u+s2L]∥∇f(X(u))∥2 du≤E(t0)−E(t)≤E(t0)\int_{t_0}^t\big[\sqrt s\,u^2+(\frac1L+\frac s2)u+\frac{\sqrt s}{2L}\big]\|\nabla f(X(u))\|^2\,du\le\mathcal E(t_0)-\mathcal E(t)\le\mathcal E(t_0)∫t0​t​[s​u2+(L1​+2s​)u+2Ls​​]∥∇f(X(u))∥2du≤E(t0​)−E(t)≤E(t0​).
  4. (4.3): the infimum is at most E(t0)\mathcal E(t_0)E(t0​) divided by s(t3−t03)/3+(1L+s2)(t2−t02)/2+s2L(t−t0)\sqrt s(t^3-t_0^3)/3+(\frac1L+\frac s2)(t^2-t_0^2)/2+\frac{\sqrt s}{2L}(t-t_0)s​(t3−t03​)/3+(L1​+2s​)(t2−t02​)/2+2Ls​​(t−t0​).
  5. E(t0)≤3s⋅L2∥x0−x⋆∥2+2∥x0−x⋆∥2\mathcal E(t_0)\le 3s\cdot\frac L2\|x_0-x^\star\|^2+2\|x_0-x^\star\|^2E(t0​)≤3s⋅2L​∥x0​−x⋆∥2+2∥x0​−x⋆∥2, from the initial conditions.
  6. (4.4): the same bound as (4.3) with numerator (2+1.5sL)∥x0−x⋆∥2(2+1.5sL)\|x_0-x^\star\|^2(2+1.5sL)∥x0​−x⋆∥2. Keeping only the cubic term of the denominator gives Theorem 5.

A companion item states Corollary 4.2 (p. 24): f(X(t))−f(x⋆)≤(4+3sL)∥x0−x⋆∥2t(2t+s)f(X(t))-f(x^\star)\le\frac{(4+3sL)\|x_0-x^\star\|^2}{t(2t+\sqrt s)}f(X(t))−f(x⋆)≤t(2t+s​)(4+3sL)∥x0​−x⋆∥2​ for t>t0t>t_0t>t0​.

Significance

Theorem 5 is the continuous-time model of the paper's Theorem 6, which shows that NAG-C itself, without modification, drives min⁡i≤k∥∇f(xi)∥2\min_{i\le k}\|\nabla f(x_i)\|^2mini≤k​∥∇f(xi​)∥2 to zero at the rate O(L2/k3)O(L^2/k^3)O(L2/k3). Combining the O(1/t2)O(1/t^2)O(1/t2) function-value rate with ∥∇f∥2≤2L(f−f⋆)\|\nabla f\|^2\le 2L(f-f^\star)∥∇f∥2≤2L(f−f⋆) gives only O(L/t2)O(L/t^2)O(L/t2). Previously known O(L2/k3)O(L^2/k^3)O(L2/k3) rates required modified methods (Ghadimi & Lan, 2016). The proof attributes the improvement to the gradient-correction term: the factor ∥∇f(X)∥2\|\nabla f(X)\|^2∥∇f(X)∥2 in Lemma 4.1 comes from the term ts ∇f(X)t\sqrt s\,\nabla f(X)ts​∇f(X) in (4.1), which exists only because of the Hessian term in (1.12). The authors conjecture that the low-resolution ODE does not achieve the 1/t31/t^31/t3 rate (p. 23).

The results of Section 4.1 are proved in the paper; no machine-checked version of them is known. Formalizing them produces a checked Lyapunov analysis of a second-order ODE with Hessian damping and explicit constants. It also gives a template that the discrete analysis of NAG-C (a separate mission in this series) mirrors step by step. Related Hessian-damped systems are analysed in Attouch, Chbani, Fadili & Riahi (2020), with qualitative integrability conclusions instead of an explicit bound on the infimum.

Difficulty

The obvious route goes through the function-value rate and the inequality ∥∇f∥2≤2L(f−f⋆)\|\nabla f\|^2\le2L(f-f^\star)∥∇f∥2≤2L(f−f⋆). It loses a factor of ttt and yields only 1/t21/t^21/t2. The cubic rate needs a Lyapunov function whose derivative contains a term proportional to t2∥∇f(X)∥2t^2\|\nabla f(X)\|^2t2∥∇f(X)∥2. Proving the derivative identity requires differentiating t↦∇f(X(t))t\mapsto\nabla f(X(t))t↦∇f(X(t)) through the chain rule with the Hessian, and then cancelling that derivative against the gradient-correction term of the ODE. The derivative bound also uses the co-coercivity inequality f(x⋆)≥f(X)+⟨∇f(X),x⋆−X⟩+12L∥∇f(X)∥2f(x^\star)\ge f(X)+\langle\nabla f(X),x^\star-X\rangle+\frac1{2L}\|\nabla f(X)\|^2f(x⋆)≥f(X)+⟨∇f(X),x⋆−X⟩+2L1​∥∇f(X)∥2 of LLL-smooth convex functions. The remaining steps are measure-theoretic: integrate a one-sided derivative bound on [t0,t][t_0,t][t0​,t], and compare an infimum with a weighted average.

Formalization scope

  • Rn\mathbb R^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), ∇f\nabla f∇f is Mathlib's gradient, and ∇2f(x)v\nabla^2 f(x)v∇2f(x)v is the Fréchet derivative of the gradient map applied to vvv.
  • The classes FL1\mathcal F^1_LFL1​ and FL2\mathcal F^2_LFL2​ are stated in the first-order form printed on p. 8. The Hessian's Lipschitz constant is existential, since the paper fixes none.
  • The minimizer x⋆x^\starx⋆ is a hypothesis f(x⋆)≤f(z)f(x^\star)\le f(z)f(x⋆)≤f(z) for all zzz. The paper presupposes it exists.
  • The step size is any s>0s>0s>0; there is no condition s≤1/Ls\le1/Ls≤1/L.
  • A solution of (1.12) is a pair (X,V)(X,V)(X,V) with X(t0)=x0X(t_0)=x_0X(t0​)=x0​ and V(t0)=−s ∇f(x0)V(t_0)=-\sqrt s\,\nabla f(x_0)V(t0​)=−s​∇f(x0​). For every t≥t0t\ge t_0t≥t0​, XXX has derivative V(t)V(t)V(t) and VVV has the derivative prescribed by (1.12), both relative to [t0,∞)[t_0,\infty)[t0​,∞).
  • Every statement quantifies over all solutions. Existence and uniqueness (the paper's Proposition 2.2) are not assumed.
  • The infimum inf⁡t0≤u≤t\inf_{t_0\le u\le t}inft0​≤u≤t​ ranges over the points of the interval [t0,t][t_0,t][t0​,t]. Statements involving it hold for t>t0t>t_0t>t0​, as on the page.
  • Derivative bounds assert that the derivative exists.
  • The integral bound asserts integrability of its integrand.

Ruled out. A formalization would hold for junk reasons in any of these cases: the infimum is written as a bounded infimum over all reals (in Lean this is ≤0\le 0≤0); the velocity is not tied to X˙\dot XX˙; the goal is stated at t=t0t=t_0t=t0​ (where Lean divides by 000); or derivatives are written with deriv, which is 000 where a function is not differentiable. The statements here avoid all of these.

Infrastructure. A complete development needs:

  • the chain rule for ∇f∘X\nabla f\circ X∇f∘X along a path;
  • the co-coercivity inequality for LLL-smooth convex functions;
  • the fundamental theorem of calculus for one-sided derivatives on [t0,t][t_0,t][t0​,t];
  • the mean-value comparison of an infimum with a weighted average.

The co-coercivity inequality and the interval-integral comparison are reusable beyond this mission. Proofs of the milestones in any order are welcome, as are independent proofs of the goal.

Selected references

  • B. Shi, S. S. Du, M. I. Jordan, W. J. Su, Understanding the Acceleration Phenomenon via High-Resolution Differential Equations, arXiv:1810.08907v3, 2018; Math. Program. (2021), DOI 10.1007/s10107-021-01681-8. https://arxiv.org/abs/1810.08907
  • W. Su, S. Boyd, E. J. Candès, A Differential Equation for Modeling Nesterov's Accelerated Gradient Method: Theory and Insights, J. Mach. Learn. Res. 17(153), 2016. https://arxiv.org/abs/1503.01243
  • Y. Nesterov, A method of solving a convex programming problem with convergence rate O(1/k²), Soviet Math. Dokl. 27, 1983. https://www.mathnet.ru/eng/dan46009
  • Y. Nesterov, How to make the gradients small, Optima 88, 2012. http://www.mathopt.org/Optima-Issues/optima88.pdf
  • S. Ghadimi, G. Lan, Accelerated gradient methods for nonconvex nonlinear and stochastic programming, Math. Program. 156, 2016. https://arxiv.org/abs/1310.3787
  • H. Attouch, Z. Chbani, J. Fadili, H. Riahi, First-order optimization algorithms via inertial systems with Hessian driven damping, Math. Program., 2020. https://arxiv.org/abs/1907.10536
9 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Control TheoryLinear algebra·Captain: mikedeng1

Lyapunov Equations, Energy Functionals, and Model Order Reduction of Bilinear and Stochastic Systems 2: An Explicit Bilinear System Whose Field x ↦ P̃(x)⁻¹x Is Not a Gradient, So (3.8) FailsResearch Paper

Motivation

Balanced truncation reduces a large control system to a small one by discarding the states that are both hard to reach and hard to observe. For linear systems "hard to reach" is measured exactly by the controllability Gramian PPP: the minimal input energy needed to steer the system from 000 to x0x_0x0​ is x0TP−1x0x_0^T P^{-1} x_0x0T​P−1x0​. For bilinear systems, in which the input also multiplies the state, no such exact formula is known, and several papers have tried to describe the nonlinear controllability energy functional EcE_cEc​ through state-dependent Gramians.

Gray and Mesko ([25] in the paper, 1998) and Condon and Ivanov ([11], 2005) stated that, for x≠0x \neq 0x=0 with ∥x∥\|x\|∥x∥ sufficiently small, the gradient of EcE_cEc​ is given by a state-dependent Gramian P~(x)\tilde P(x)P~(x) of the linearization, ∇Ec(x)=P~(x)−1x\nabla E_c(x) = \tilde P(x)^{-1}x∇Ec​(x)=P~(x)−1x, and derived from this comparison inequalities between EcE_cEc​ and the algebraic Gramian. Benner and Damm (SIAM J. Control Optim. 49(2), 2011, doi:10.1137/09075041X) observed that this formula needs an integrability condition that is not automatic, and gave an explicit two-dimensional system for which it fails (Example 3.3, pp. 697–698). This mission formalizes that counterexample.

Setting

A bilinear control system with state x(t)∈Rnx(t) \in \mathbb R^nx(t)∈Rn and input u(t)∈Rmu(t) \in \mathbb R^mu(t)∈Rm is

x˙=Ax+∑j=1mNjx uj+Bu,\dot x = Ax + \sum_{j=1}^m N_j x\, u_j + Bu,x˙=Ax+j=1∑m​Nj​xuj​+Bu,

with real matrices A,N1,…,Nm∈Rn×nA, N_1, \dots, N_m \in \mathbb R^{n\times n}A,N1​,…,Nm​∈Rn×n and B∈Rn×mB \in \mathbb R^{n \times m}B∈Rn×m; write bjb_jbj​ for the jjj-th column of BBB. The system is locally controllable if the pair (A,B)(A, B)(A,B) is controllable, that is, the Kalman matrix [B,AB,…,An−1B][B, AB, \dots, A^{n-1}B][B,AB,…,An−1B] has rank nnn.

Linearizing the system at a state xxx and the input u=0u = 0u=0 gives a linear system whose input matrix has columns Njx+bjN_j x + b_jNj​x+bj​. Its controllability Gramian P~(x)\tilde P(x)P~(x) is the solution of the Lyapunov equation

AP~(x)+P~(x)AT=−∑j=1m(Njx+bj)(Njx+bj)T.(3.9)A \tilde P(x) + \tilde P(x) A^T = -\sum_{j=1}^m (N_j x + b_j)(N_j x + b_j)^T. \tag{3.9}AP~(x)+P~(x)AT=−j=1∑m​(Nj​x+bj​)(Nj​x+bj​)T.(3.9)

When AAA is stable, (3.9) has exactly one solution for every xxx, and it is symmetric. The claim under test is

∇Ec(x)=P~(x)−1xfor x≠0, ∥x∥ sufficiently small.(3.8)\nabla E_c(x) = \tilde P(x)^{-1} x \qquad \text{for } x \neq 0,\ \|x\| \text{ sufficiently small.} \tag{3.8}∇Ec​(x)=P~(x)−1xfor x=0, ∥x∥ sufficiently small.(3.8)

A vector field FFF on an open set is integrable (a gradient field) if F=∇EF = \nabla EF=∇E for some real function EEE.

Example 3.3 is the single-input system (n=2n = 2n=2, m=1m = 1m=1) with

A=[−100−2],N=ν[0110],b=[11],A = \begin{bmatrix} -1 & 0 \\ 0 & -2 \end{bmatrix}, \qquad N = \nu \begin{bmatrix} 0 & 1 \\ 1 & 0 \end{bmatrix}, \qquad b = \begin{bmatrix} 1 \\ 1 \end{bmatrix},A=[−10​0−2​],N=ν[01​10​],b=[11​],

and a real parameter ν\nuν. In Lean these are exA, exN ν and exb (with exB the 2×12\times 12×1 matrix [b][b][b]), equation (3.9) is IsLinGramian, and controllability is IsControllable.

Formalization targets

Goal: Example 3.3

For every ν≠0\nu \neq 0ν=0, with P~(x)\tilde P(x)P~(x) solving (3.9) for every x∈R2x \in \mathbb R^2x∈R2: the pair (A,b)(A, b)(A,b) is controllable, and for every ε>0\varepsilon > 0ε>0 there is no E:R2→RE : \mathbb R^2 \to \mathbb RE:R2→R with

∇E(x)=P~(x)−1xfor all 0<∥x∥<ε.\nabla E(x) = \tilde P(x)^{-1}x \qquad \text{for all } 0 < \|x\| < \varepsilon .∇E(x)=P~(x)−1xfor all 0<∥x∥<ε.

The goal refutes every potential EEE, not only EcE_cEc​, so it does not depend on how EcE_cEc​ is defined; it is exactly the statement that the field is not integrable on any punctured neighbourhood of the origin, which is how (3.8) is claimed.

Milestones, in the order the example uses them

  1. Local controllability: (A,b)(A, b)(A,b) is controllable.
  2. The derivative of F(x)=P~(x)−1xF(x) = \tilde P(x)^{-1}xF(x)=P~(x)−1x (general nnn, mmm): where P~(x)\tilde P(x)P~(x) is invertible,
F′(x)h=P~(x)−1h−P~(x)−1P~x′(h)P~(x)−1x,AP~x′(h)+P~x′(h)AT=−∑j(Njh(Njx+bj)T+(Njx+bj)hTNjT).F'(x)h = \tilde P(x)^{-1}h - \tilde P(x)^{-1}\tilde P'_x(h)\tilde P(x)^{-1}x, \qquad A\tilde P'_x(h) + \tilde P'_x(h)A^T = -\sum_{j}\big(N_j h (N_j x + b_j)^T + (N_j x + b_j)h^TN_j^T\big).F′(x)h=P~(x)−1h−P~(x)−1P~x′​(h)P~(x)−1x,AP~x′​(h)+P~x′​(h)AT=−j∑​(Nj​h(Nj​x+bj​)T+(Nj​x+bj​)hTNjT​).
  1. The explicit Gramian at x=ξ(1,1)Tx = \xi(1,1)^Tx=ξ(1,1)T, 1+νξ≠01 + \nu\xi \neq 01+νξ=0:
P~(x)=(1+νξ)2[1/21/31/31/4],P~(x)−1=6(1+νξ)2[3−4−46].\tilde P(x) = (1+\nu\xi)^2\begin{bmatrix} 1/2 & 1/3 \\ 1/3 & 1/4\end{bmatrix}, \qquad \tilde P(x)^{-1} = \frac{6}{(1+\nu\xi)^2}\begin{bmatrix} 3 & -4 \\ -4 & 6\end{bmatrix}.P~(x)=(1+νξ)2[1/21/3​1/31/4​],P~(x)−1=(1+νξ)26​[3−4​−46​].
  1. The non-symmetric Jacobian at x=ξ(1,1)Tx = \xi(1,1)^Tx=ξ(1,1)T, νξ≠0\nu\xi \neq 0νξ=0, 1+νξ≠01+\nu\xi \neq 01+νξ=0:
F′(x)=P~(x)−1+12νξ(1+νξ)3[2−1−42],not symmetric.F'(x) = \tilde P(x)^{-1} + \frac{12\nu\xi}{(1+\nu\xi)^3}\begin{bmatrix} 2 & -1 \\ -4 & 2\end{bmatrix}, \quad \text{not symmetric.}F′(x)=P~(x)−1+(1+νξ)312νξ​[2−4​−12​],not symmetric.

Significance

The result. The example shows that the state-dependent Gramian P~(x)\tilde P(x)P~(x) of the linearization does not, in general, describe the controllability energy of a bilinear system through (3.8), even for a locally controllable system and arbitrarily close to the origin. As a consequence, the inequalities Ec(x0)>x0TP−1x0E_c(x_0) > x_0^TP^{-1}x_0Ec​(x0​)>x0T​P−1x0​ and Eo(x0)<x0TQx0E_o(x_0) < x_0^TQx_0Eo​(x0​)<x0T​Qx0​ derived in [25, 11] from (3.8) lose their justification, and the comparison of EcE_cEc​ with the algebraic Gramian requires the different argument the paper develops in its later sections. The example is a minimal one: two states, one input, one coupling parameter.

Formalizing it. The counterexample is proved in the paper by a hand computation through Kronecker products, and that computation contains a sign slip (see below); a machine-checked version settles the claim independently of it. The result is proved in the paper and, to our knowledge, has not been formalized anywhere. The general derivative formula (milestone 2) is reusable for any parametric Lyapunov equation.

Difficulty

The obvious route is to compute the Jacobian of FFF at one point and observe that it is not symmetric. Two steps of this route need care. First, P~(x)\tilde P(x)P~(x) is defined only implicitly, through (3.9) at every point, so its differentiability in xxx, and that of its inverse, must be derived from the invertibility of the Lyapunov operator X↦AX+XATX \mapsto AX + XA^TX↦AX+XAT and of P~(x)\tilde P(x)P~(x) near the point. Second, passing from "the Jacobian of FFF is not symmetric" to "FFF is not a gradient" requires the symmetry of second derivatives of a function that is only assumed differentiable with gradient FFF on a punctured ball; the regularity of EEE is inherited from that of FFF, not assumed. The goal is also not a statement about a single point: it must hold for every radius ε\varepsilonε, so the asymmetry must be exhibited at points arbitrarily close to the origin, where it is of order νξ\nu\xiνξ.

Formalization scope

  • Scalars are real; states are Fin n → ℝ, matrices Matrix (Fin n) (Fin n) ℝ, the paper's indices j=1,…,mj = 1, \dots, mj=1,…,m are Fin m. In the goal the plane is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin 2) and the potential is required to satisfy HasGradientAt at each point of the punctured ball 0<∥x∥<ε0 < \|x\| < \varepsilon0<∥x∥<ε, with no further regularity.
  • P~\tilde PP~ enters as an arbitrary function satisfying (3.9) at every point. For the example data (3.9) has exactly one solution at every xxx, so this is the paper's "defined by (3.9)", and the hypothesis is satisfiable.
  • Added hypothesis ν≠0\nu \neq 0ν=0. The paper says ν\nuν is "irrelevant for the computation", but its asymmetry term is proportional to νξ\nu\xiνξ; at ν=0\nu = 0ν=0 the Gramian is constant and the field is a gradient.
  • Repaired sign. The equation for P~x′(h)\tilde P'_x(h)P~x′​(h) on p. 697 is printed without parentheses after the minus sign, and the Kronecker formula for vec⁡P~x′(h)\operatorname{vec}\tilde P'_x(h)vecP~x′​(h) drops the minus sign of (3.9). Milestone 2 places the minus sign on both terms. The matrix 12νξ(1+νξ)3[2−1−42]\frac{12\nu\xi}{(1+\nu\xi)^3}\left[\begin{smallmatrix} 2 & -1 \\ -4 & 2\end{smallmatrix}\right](1+νξ)312νξ​[2−4​−12​] of the paper is, with the sign restored, the matrix of h↦−P~−1P~x′(h)P~−1xh \mapsto -\tilde P^{-1}\tilde P'_x(h)\tilde P^{-1}xh↦−P~−1P~x′​(h)P~−1x; milestone 4 therefore states F′(x)=P~(x)−1F'(x) = \tilde P(x)^{-1}F′(x)=P~(x)−1 plus this matrix. The non-symmetry conclusion is unchanged.
  • Matrix inverses are Mathlib's Matrix.inv, which returns 000 at singular matrices; P~(x)\tilde P(x)P~(x) is invertible near the origin, and milestones 2–4 assume invertibility (or 1+νξ≠01 + \nu\xi \neq 01+νξ=0) where they use it.
  • The observability half of (3.8), ∇Eo(x)=Q~(x)x\nabla E_o(x) = \tilde Q(x)x∇Eo​(x)=Q~​(x)x, which the paper says "can be argued similarly" without a proof, is not part of the mission.
  • A trivializing formalization is ruled out: P~\tilde PP~ is pinned by (3.9) at every point (a free P~\tilde PP~ would make the claim meaningless), and non-integrability is stated as the non-existence of a potential, not as the non-symmetry of some matrix.

Contributions welcome: proofs of the four milestones, in particular the smooth dependence of the solution of a Lyapunov equation on its right-hand side (milestone 2), which is general and reusable.

Selected references

  • P. Benner, T. Damm, Lyapunov Equations, Energy Functionals, and Model Order Reduction of Bilinear and Stochastic Systems, SIAM J. Control Optim. 49(2), 686–711, 2011. https://doi.org/10.1137/09075041X
  • W. S. Gray, J. Mesko, Energy functions and algebraic Gramians for bilinear systems, Proc. 4th IFAC Nonlinear Control Systems Design Symposium, Enschede, 1998, pp. 103–108.
  • M. Condon, R. Ivanov, Nonlinear systems — algebraic Gramians and model reduction, COMPEL 24, 202–219, 2005.
  • E. I. Verriest, Time variant balancing and nonlinear balanced realizations, in Model Order Reduction: Theory, Research Aspects and Applications, Mathematics in Industry 13, Springer, 2008, pp. 203–222.
7 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Fast Convergence of Inertial Dynamics and Algorithms with Asymptotic Vanishing Viscosity 2: For Strongly Convex Φ and α > 3, Φ(x(t)) − min Φ, ‖x(t) − x*‖² and ‖ẋ(t)‖² Are O(t^(−2α/3))Research Paper

Motivation

Nesterov's accelerated gradient method minimizes a smooth convex function at the rate O(k−2)\mathcal O(k^{-2})O(k−2) in the number of iterations kkk, against O(k−1)\mathcal O(k^{-1})O(k−1) for plain gradient descent. Su, Boyd and Candès (arXiv:1503.01243) observed that, as the step size tends to zero, Nesterov's scheme becomes the second-order differential equation

x¨(t)+αtx˙(t)+∇Φ(x(t))=0(1)\ddot x(t)+\frac{\alpha}{t}\dot x(t)+\nabla\Phi(x(t))=0\tag{1}x¨(t)+tα​x˙(t)+∇Φ(x(t))=0(1)

with α=3\alpha=3α=3, a heavy-ball system whose friction coefficient α/t\alpha/tα/t vanishes as t→+∞t\to+\inftyt→+∞ (asymptotic vanishing damping). Studying (1) in continuous time gives Lyapunov arguments that are then discretized into new algorithms.

Attouch, Chbani, Peypouquet and Redont (Math. Program. 168 (2018), DOI 10.1007/s10107-016-0992-8) analyse (1) for general α\alphaα. This mission formalizes their result for strongly convex Φ\PhiΦ, where the rate of convergence of (1) depends on α\alphaα and improves without bound as α\alphaα grows.

Timeline.

  • 2014–2016: Su, Boyd and Candès prove Φ(x(t))−min⁡Φ=O(t−2)\Phi(x(t))-\min\Phi=\mathcal O(t^{-2})Φ(x(t))−minΦ=O(t−2) for convex Φ\PhiΦ and α≥3\alpha\ge3α≥3, and O(t−3)\mathcal O(t^{-3})O(t−3) for strongly convex Φ\PhiΦ when α>9/2\alpha>9/2α>9/2 ([44, Theorem 4.2] in the paper).
  • 2015 (this paper): every trajectory converges weakly to a minimizer when α>3\alpha>3α>3; for strongly convex Φ\PhiΦ and every α>3\alpha>3α>3, the values, the squared distance to the minimizer and the squared velocity are O(t−2α/3)\mathcal O(t^{-2\alpha/3})O(t−2α/3).

Setting

Let H\mathcal HH be a real Hilbert space with inner product ⟨⋅,⋅⟩\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨⋅,⋅⟩ and norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥, and let Φ:H→R\Phi:\mathcal H\to\mathbb RΦ:H→R be continuously differentiable with gradient ∇Φ\nabla\Phi∇Φ. Fix α>0\alpha>0α>0 and t0>0t_0>0t0​>0. A solution of (1) is a twice differentiable trajectory x:[t0,+∞[→Hx:[t_0,+\infty[\to\mathcal Hx:[t0​,+∞[→H with velocity x˙\dot xx˙ satisfying (1) at every t≥t0t\ge t_0t≥t0​.

Φ\PhiΦ is strongly convex with constant μ>0\mu>0μ>0 if

Φ(y)≥Φ(x)+⟨∇Φ(x),y−x⟩+μ2∥x−y∥2for all x,y∈H.\Phi(y)\ge\Phi(x)+\langle\nabla\Phi(x),y-x\rangle+\frac\mu2\|x-y\|^2\qquad\text{for all }x,y\in\mathcal H.Φ(y)≥Φ(x)+⟨∇Φ(x),y−x⟩+2μ​∥x−y∥2for all x,y∈H.

Such a Φ\PhiΦ has exactly one minimizer x∗x^*x∗, and min⁡Φ=Φ(x∗)\min\Phi=\Phi(x^*)minΦ=Φ(x∗).

For λ≥0\lambda\ge0λ≥0, p≥0p\ge0p≥0 the anchored energy is

Eλp(t)=tp(t2(Φ(x(t))−min⁡Φ)+12∥λ(x(t)−x∗)+tx˙(t)∥2),\mathcal E^p_\lambda(t)=t^p\Big(t^2\big(\Phi(x(t))-\min\Phi\big)+\tfrac12\|\lambda(x(t)-x^*)+t\dot x(t)\|^2\Big),Eλp​(t)=tp(t2(Φ(x(t))−minΦ)+21​∥λ(x(t)−x∗)+tx˙(t)∥2),

a sum of nonnegative terms. The proof of the main theorem fixes

p=23(α−3),λ=23α,t1=max⁡{t0,pλ/μ}.p=\tfrac23(\alpha-3),\qquad\lambda=\tfrac23\alpha,\qquad t_1=\max\Big\{t_0,\sqrt{p\lambda/\mu}\Big\}.p=32​(α−3),λ=32​α,t1​=max{t0​,pλ/μ​}.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.4 (p. 11)

For strongly convex Φ\PhiΦ and α>3\alpha>3α>3, every solution xxx of (1) converges strongly to the unique minimizer x∗x^*x∗, and

Φ(x(t))−min⁡Φ=O(t−23α),∥x(t)−x∗∥2=O(t−23α),∥x˙(t)∥2=O(t−23α)(25)\Phi(x(t))-\min\Phi=\mathcal O\big(t^{-\frac23\alpha}\big),\qquad\|x(t)-x^*\|^2=\mathcal O\big(t^{-\frac23\alpha}\big),\qquad\|\dot x(t)\|^2=\mathcal O\big(t^{-\frac23\alpha}\big)\tag{25}Φ(x(t))−minΦ=O(t−32​α),∥x(t)−x∗∥2=O(t−32​α),∥x˙(t)∥2=O(t−32​α)(25)

as t→+∞t\to+\inftyt→+∞. The goal states the asymptotic form; the explicit constants are milestones.

Milestones (explicit forms, valid for t≥t1t\ge t_1t≥t1​)

  1. The derivative identity (10) for Eλp\mathcal E^p_\lambdaEλp​ along solutions of (1), for any λ,p≥0\lambda,p\ge0λ,p≥0.
  2. Its strongly convex upper bound (first display of the proof of Theorem 3.4).
  3. (26): Eλp(t)≤Eλp(t1)+λp4tp∥x(t)−x∗∥2≤Eλp(t1)+λp2μtp(Φ(x(t))−min⁡Φ)\mathcal E^p_\lambda(t)\le\mathcal E^p_\lambda(t_1)+\frac{\lambda p}{4}t^p\|x(t)-x^*\|^2\le\mathcal E^p_\lambda(t_1)+\frac{\lambda p}{2\mu}t^p(\Phi(x(t))-\min\Phi)Eλp​(t)≤Eλp​(t1​)+4λp​tp∥x(t)−x∗∥2≤Eλp​(t1​)+2μλp​tp(Φ(x(t))−minΦ).
  4. (27): Φ(x(t))−min⁡Φ≤2Eλp(t1) t−23α\Phi(x(t))-\min\Phi\le2\mathcal E^p_\lambda(t_1)\,t^{-\frac23\alpha}Φ(x(t))−minΦ≤2Eλp​(t1​)t−32​α.
  5. (28): ∥x(t)−x∗∥2≤2μ(Φ(x(t))−min⁡Φ)≤4μEλp(t1) t−23α\|x(t)-x^*\|^2\le\frac2\mu(\Phi(x(t))-\min\Phi)\le\frac4\mu\mathcal E^p_\lambda(t_1)\,t^{-\frac23\alpha}∥x(t)−x∗∥2≤μ2​(Φ(x(t))−minΦ)≤μ4​Eλp​(t1​)t−32​α.
  6. Last display of the proof: ∥x˙(t)∥2≤4(1+α/(α−3))2Eλp(t1) t−23α\|\dot x(t)\|^2\le4\big(1+\sqrt{\alpha/(\alpha-3)}\big)^2\mathcal E^p_\lambda(t_1)\,t^{-\frac23\alpha}∥x˙(t)∥2≤4(1+α/(α−3)​)2Eλp​(t1​)t−32​α.

Significance

The theorem shows that the rate of (1) on strongly convex functions is not capped at O(t−2)\mathcal O(t^{-2})O(t−2) or O(t−3)\mathcal O(t^{-3})O(t−3): the exponent 2α/32\alpha/32α/3 grows linearly in α\alphaα, and it already exceeds 222 for every α>3\alpha>3α>3. It extends [44, Theorem 4.2], which needs α>9/2\alpha>9/2α>9/2 and gives O(t−3)\mathcal O(t^{-3})O(t−3). The same parametrized energy Eλp\mathcal E^p_\lambdaEλp​ is the template for the discrete analyses of Nesterov-type algorithms with parameter α\alphaα, so its derivative identity (10) is reusable beyond this mission.

The result is proved on paper. To the best of current knowledge none of it is formalized: Mathlib has no theory of inertial dynamics, and the platform's strongly convex rates concern discrete methods. A completed mission gives a machine-checked Lyapunov analysis of a non-autonomous second-order ODE in a Hilbert space, with the explicit constants of the paper.

Difficulty

The derivative identity (10) is a computation, but it must be carried out with one-sided derivatives at t0t_0t0​, real powers tpt^ptp, and the chain rule for Φ∘x\Phi\circ xΦ∘x in an infinite-dimensional space. The obvious argument, that Eλp\mathcal E^p_\lambdaEλp​ is nonincreasing, fails: even with the best choice of ppp and λ\lambdaλ the bound on its derivative keeps a term λp2tp⟨x−x∗,x˙⟩\frac{\lambda p}{2}t^p\langle x-x^*,\dot x\rangle2λp​tp⟨x−x∗,x˙⟩ of no fixed sign, and only for t≥t1t\ge t_1t≥t1​ is the quadratic term in ∥x−x∗∥2\|x-x^*\|^2∥x−x∗∥2 nonpositive. Passing from the differential inequality to (26) therefore needs integration on [t1,t][t_1,t][t1​,t] for functions known only through one-sided derivatives. The velocity bound then combines (26), (27) and (28) through square roots, and the goal additionally requires the existence of the minimizer in an infinite-dimensional space, which is a compactness argument (weak lower semicontinuity) and not an algebraic one.

Formalization scope

  • H\mathcal HH is any real Hilbert space (InnerProductSpace ℝ H, CompleteSpace H), not Rn\mathbb R^nRn. Φ\PhiΦ is ContDiff ℝ 1 and ∇Φ\nabla\Phi∇Φ is Mathlib's gradient.
  • A solution is a pair (x,v)(x,v)(x,v) with t0>0t_0>0t0​>0, where xxx has derivative v(t)v(t)v(t) and vvv has derivative −αtv(t)−∇Φ(x(t))-\frac\alpha t v(t)-\nabla\Phi(x(t))−tα​v(t)−∇Φ(x(t)) within [t0,+∞[[t_0,+\infty[[t0​,+∞[ at every t≥t0t\ge t_0t≥t0​; x˙\dot xx˙ is vvv.
  • Strong convexity is the gradient inequality printed on p. 10, with μ>0\mu>0μ>0; min⁡Φ\min\PhiminΦ is written Φ(x∗)\Phi(x^*)Φ(x∗) with x∗x^*x∗ a minimizer.
  • tpt^ptp is the real power, only evaluated at t≥t0>0t\ge t_0>0t≥t0​>0; ppp, λ\lambdaλ, t1t_1t1​ are named definitions shared by the milestones.
  • O\mathcal OO in (25) is Asymptotics.IsBigO along atTop; strong convergence is norm convergence. The existence and uniqueness of x∗x^*x∗ are conclusions of the goal, not hypotheses, so the goal cannot be satisfied vacuously by an empty argmin; the strong-convexity hypothesis is satisfiable (e.g. Φ=∥⋅∥2\Phi=\|\cdot\|^2Φ=∥⋅∥2 with μ=2\mu=2μ=2, and x≡0x\equiv0x≡0 solves (1)).
  • Theorem numbers and pages are those of the Optimization Online preprint 5179 (October 2015), not of the journal typesetting.

Useful infrastructure: the derivative of Φ∘x\Phi\circ xΦ∘x via gradient, integration of differential inequalities on [t0,+∞[[t_0,+\infty[[t0​,+∞[, and existence of minimizers of strongly convex continuous functions on Hilbert spaces. Proofs of any milestone, and of the goal from the milestones, are welcome.

Selected references

  • H. Attouch, Z. Chbani, J. Peypouquet, P. Redont, Fast convergence of inertial dynamics and algorithms with asymptotic vanishing damping, Optimization Online preprint 5179, 2015. https://optimization-online.org/wp-content/uploads/2015/10/5179.pdf
  • H. Attouch, Z. Chbani, J. Peypouquet, P. Redont, Fast convergence of inertial dynamics and algorithms with asymptotic vanishing viscosity, Math. Program. 168 (2018), 123–175. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-016-0992-8
  • W. Su, S. Boyd, E. J. Candès, A differential equation for modeling Nesterov's accelerated gradient method: theory and insights, J. Mach. Learn. Res. 17 (2016). https://arxiv.org/abs/1503.01243
  • Y. Nesterov, A method of solving a convex programming problem with convergence rate O(1/k²), Soviet Math. Dokl. 27 (1983), 372–376.
9 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Pure Mathematics·Captain: wurtle

Ergodicity of triangular billiards with an irrational angleResearch Paper

Motivation

A billiard in a polygon is a point moving at unit speed inside the table and reflecting off the sides by the law "angle of incidence equals angle of reflection". It is one of the simplest Hamiltonian systems and a standard model in mathematical physics; triangles also model two point masses colliding on a segment. The natural invariant probability measure is normalized area times uniform direction, and the basic question is ergodicity: are the only flow-invariant sets of measure 000 or 111? For polygons with angles that are rational multiples of π\piπ the answer is no (the phase space splits into invariant surfaces, one for each family of directions). For triangles with an irrational angle the question has been open for every individual triangle, with only generic or specially approximable examples known.

Timeline

  • 1975. Zemlyakov and Katok construct the phase space, show that vertex-hitting trajectories form a null set, and prove topological transitivity for irrational polygons (doi:10.1007/BF01818045).
  • 1986. Kerckhoff, Masur and Smillie prove unique ergodicity in almost every direction for rational polygons, and ergodicity of the full flow for a dense GδG_\deltaGδ​ set of polygons (doi:10.2307/1971280).
  • 1997. Vorobets gives an explicit approximation condition implying ergodicity, with examples including irrational right triangles (doi:10.1070/SM1997v188n03ABEH000211).
  • 2002. Masur and Tabachnikov survey rational billiards and flat structures (doi:10.1016/S1874-575X(02)80015-7).
  • 2014 and 2022. Numerical studies of irrational right triangles and irrational isosceles triangles raise doubts about ergodicity (doi:10.1103/PhysRevE.89.042918, doi:10.1103/PhysRevE.105.L012201).
  • 2025. Forni and Moll develop a cohomological-equation framework for flat surfaces with cone points, proving constancy of sufficiently regular invariant functions under non-rational holonomy (arXiv:2510.18128).
  • 2026. Chaika and Forni prove weak mixing for a dense GδG_\deltaGδ​ set of nnn-gons (doi:10.4007/annals.2026.203.3.1).

The source of this mission, an OpenAI preprint dated September 25, 2026, claims ergodicity for every triangle with at least one irrational angle.

Setting

Let QQQ be the open interior of a nondegenerate triangle in R2\mathbb R^2R2 with angles α,β,γ\alpha,\beta,\gammaα,β,γ. The phase space is Q×S1Q\times S^1Q×S1 (position and unit direction). The billiard flow Φt\Phi_tΦt​ moves a state in a straight line at unit speed; on reaching an open side it reflects the direction across that side (tangential component preserved, normal component reversed). Trajectories that hit a vertex, in either time direction, have no continuation and are discarded; they form a null set. The invariant probability measure is

dμ=dA dθ2π Area(Q).d\mu=\frac{dA\,d\theta}{2\pi\,\mathrm{Area}(Q)}.dμ=2πArea(Q)dAdθ​.

Φt\Phi_tΦt​ is ergodic if every measurable AAA with μ(Φt−1A △ A)=0\mu(\Phi_t^{-1}A\,\triangle\,A)=0μ(Φt−1​A△A)=0 for all t∈Rt\in\mathbb Rt∈R has μ(A)∈{0,1}\mu(A)\in\{0,1\}μ(A)∈{0,1}.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1

If at least one of α/π\alpha/\piα/π, β/π\beta/\piβ/π, γ/π\gamma/\piγ/π is irrational, then the billiard flow on Q×S1Q\times S^1Q×S1 is ergodic for μ\muμ:

μ(Φt−1A △ A)=0  ∀t∈R⟹μ(A)∈{0,1}.\mu(\Phi_t^{-1}A\,\triangle\,A)=0\ \ \forall t\in\mathbb R\quad\Longrightarrow\quad\mu(A)\in\{0,1\}.μ(Φt−1​A△A)=0  ∀t∈R⟹μ(A)∈{0,1}.

The Lean statement OAI.TriangularBilliards.irrational_triangle_billiard also asks for the standard well-posedness facts (almost every state has a unique complete trajectory avoiding vertices, each Φt\Phi_tΦt​ preserves μ\muμ, and Φs+t=Φs∘Φt\Phi_{s+t}=\Phi_s\circ\Phi_tΦs+t​=Φs​∘Φt​ almost everywhere), so that the ergodicity clause is about the actual billiard flow. It is open on the platform.

Significance

The theorem settles ergodicity for the entire class of triangles with an irrational angle, including triangles with one rational and two irrational angles, with no genericity or Diophantine condition; earlier results gave ergodicity only for a residual set or for tables with exceptionally fast rational approximations. It also contradicts the non-ergodicity suggested by numerical experiments, which can now be attributed to slow convergence. The paper derives interior and boundary quantum ergodicity of Dirichlet and Neumann eigenbases and growth of nodal-domain counts for these triangles. The claim is ergodicity only, not mixing or unique ergodicity.

The result is claimed in an OpenAI preprint; it has not been peer reviewed and no machine-checked proof exists.

Difficulty

Triangle sides are straight, so there is no dispersing curvature to drive hyperbolicity, and trajectories near vertices have no continuous continuation. Rational-approximation arguments (Kerckhoff–Masur–Smillie, Vorobets) only reach generic or specially approximable tables. The Forni–Moll framework shows that invariant functions with horizontal Sobolev regularity are constant under non-rational holonomy, but a bounded invariant indicator has no such regularity a priori: one obtains an L2L^2L2 gradient for each angular Fourier coefficient separately, not a square-summable family, and must show each of these gradients vanishes.

Formalization scope

  • A Triangle is three affinely independent points of ℂ; table is the interior of their convex hull; side i is an open segment; angle i is the interior angle at vertex i via InnerProductGeometry.angle.
  • Phase space is ℂ × Circle with the product of normalized area on the table and the uniform angular probability (pushforward of normalized Lebesgue measure on [0,2π)[0,2\pi)[0,2π)).
  • A FlightChain is a bi-infinite strictly increasing sequence of collision times, unbounded in both directions, with collisions in open sides, straight flights through the open table, and specular reflection reflect across the side tangent. billiardFlow follows the unique chain if one exists and is the identity otherwise; the theorem must prove the singular set is null.
  • Ergodicity is stated for measurable sets with μ(Φt−1A△A)=0\mu(\Phi_t^{-1}A\triangle A)=0μ(Φt−1​A△A)=0 for every real ttt.

A complete development needs the geometry of unfolding, the null measure of vertex-hitting trajectories, Liouville measure preservation for billiards, angular Fourier decomposition on the doubled triangle, and holonomy arguments. Formalizing the well-posedness clauses alone (measure preservation and the a.e. flow property) is reusable for all polygonal billiards and is a welcome first contribution.

Selected references

  • OpenAI, Ergodicity of triangular billiards with an irrational angle, preprint, September 25, 2026. https://github.com/openai/math/blob/adc7f1241b42e322a6451854ab7e4b4c146bf78a/preprints/Ergodicity-of-triangular-billiards-with-an-irrational-angle-September-25-2026/Ergodicity-of-triangular-billiards-with-an-irrational-angle-September-25-2026.pdf
  • A. N. Zemlyakov, A. B. Katok, Topological transitivity of billiards in polygons, Math. Notes, 1975. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01818045
  • S. Kerckhoff, H. Masur, J. Smillie, Ergodicity of billiard flows and quadratic differentials, Ann. of Math., 1986. https://doi.org/10.2307/1971280
  • Ya. B. Vorobets, Ergodicity of billiards in polygons, Sb. Math., 1997. https://doi.org/10.1070/SM1997v188n03ABEH000211
  • H. Masur, S. Tabachnikov, Rational billiards and flat structures, Handbook of Dynamical Systems, 2002. https://doi.org/10.1016/S1874-575X(02)80015-7
  • J. Chaika, G. Forni, Weakly mixing polygonal billiards, Ann. of Math., 2026. https://doi.org/10.4007/annals.2026.203.3.1
  • G. Forni, N. Moll, Cohomological equation for geodesic flows on flat surfaces, preprint, 2025. https://arxiv.org/abs/2510.18128
2 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Analysis·Captain: wurtle

Boundedness and persistence of weakly reversible mass-action systemsResearch Paper

Motivation: can a weakly reversible reaction network lose a species or blow up?

Chemical reaction network theory studies the polynomial differential equations that describe concentrations of interacting species under mass-action kinetics, where each reaction proceeds at a rate proportional to the product of the concentrations of its reactants. A central theme is which properties of the dynamics are forced by the structure of the reaction graph alone, independently of the (usually unknown) rate constants. Weak reversibility — every reaction can be undone by some directed path of reactions — is the main structural condition in this theory. Two long-standing conjectures ask whether weak reversibility alone guarantees that no species dies out (persistence) and that no concentration grows without bound (boundedness). These questions matter for systems biology and chemical engineering, where extinction of a species or unbounded growth would contradict the modeled behavior, and they are closely tied to the global attractor conjecture for complex-balanced systems.

Timeline

  • 1972 — Horn and Jackson develop the equilibrium and stability theory of complex-balanced mass-action systems (ARMA 1972); Horn (ARMA 1972) and Feinberg (ARMA 1972) give complex-balancing criteria and the deficiency-zero analysis.
  • 1987 — Feinberg formulates the expectation that a positive trajectory of a weakly reversible system cannot converge to a boundary point (Chem. Eng. Sci. 1987, Remark 6.1.E).
  • 2010 — August and Barahona state the general boundedness and persistence conclusion (IFAC 2010); the source identifies a gap in one step of their proof (p. 2).
  • 2011 — Anderson separates the boundedness conjecture from the persistence conjecture and proves boundedness for a single linkage class (J. Math. Chem. 2011); he also proves the global attractor conjecture in the single-linkage case (SIAM J. Appl. Math. 2011).
  • 2012–2013 — Pantea proves persistence of bounded trajectories when the stoichiometric subspace has dimension two (SIAM J. Math. Anal. 2012); Craciun, Nazarov and Pantea prove boundedness, persistence and permanence for two-species systems (SIAM J. Appl. Math. 2013).
  • 2014 — Gopalkrishnan, Miller and Shiu prove permanence for strongly endotactic systems (SIAM J. Appl. Dyn. Syst. 2014).
  • 2019–2020 — Boros proves every positive stoichiometric class of a weakly reversible system contains a positive equilibrium (SIAM J. Math. Anal. 2019); Boros and Hofbauer reprove single-linkage permanence (SIAM J. Appl. Dyn. Syst. 2020).
  • 2026 — Craciun's revised toric-differential-inclusion approach gives persistence for bounded trajectories (arXiv:1501.02860v3).
  • 2026 — The OpenAI preprint Boundedness and persistence of weakly reversible mass-action systems (OpenAI Math Release, September 25, 2026) claims both conjectures for constant positive rates in every dimension. It has not been peer reviewed and its theorem is not formally verified.

Setting

Fix d≥1d\ge1d≥1 species. A reaction network consists of a finite set of complexes C⊂Z≥0d\mathcal C\subset\mathbb Z_{\ge0}^dC⊂Z≥0d​ and a set R\mathcal RR of reactions y→y′y\to y'y→y′ with y,y′∈Cy,y'\in\mathcal Cy,y′∈C, y≠y′y\neq y'y=y′. It is weakly reversible if for every reaction y→y′y\to y'y→y′ there is a directed path of reactions from y′y'y′ back to yyy. Given positive rate constants κy→y′>0\kappa_{y\to y'}>0κy→y′​>0, the mass-action system is

x˙=f(x)=∑y→y′∈Rκy→y′ xy (y′−y),xy=∏i=1dxiyi.\dot x = f(x)=\sum_{y\to y'\in\mathcal R}\kappa_{y\to y'}\,x^{y}\,(y'-y),\qquad x^y=\prod_{i=1}^d x_i^{y_i}.x˙=f(x)=y→y′∈R∑​κy→y′​xy(y′−y),xy=i=1∏d​xiyi​​.

A positive trajectory is persistent if lim inf⁡t→∞xi(t)>0\liminf_{t\to\infty}x_i(t)>0liminft→∞​xi​(t)>0 for every iii.

In Lean (namespace OAI.Problem326), a ReactionNetwork d has a Finset of complexes in Fin d → ℕ and a Finset of reactions between them with distinct source and target; WeaklyReversible is Relation.TransGen reachability from target back to source; massAction N κ is the vector field above; and IsGlobalForwardSolution N κ x0 x means x(0)=x0x(0)=x_0x(0)=x0​ and xxx has derivative f(x(t))f(x(t))f(x(t)) at every t≥0t\ge0t≥0.

Formalization targets

Goal: global existence, boundedness and persistence (Theorem 1.1)

Let d≥1d\ge1d≥1, let the network be weakly reversible and all rates positive. For every x0∈R>0dx^0\in\mathbb R_{>0}^dx0∈R>0d​ the solution with x(0)=x0x(0)=x^0x(0)=x0 exists for all t≥0t\ge0t≥0, and there is ε∈(0,1)\varepsilon\in(0,1)ε∈(0,1), depending on the network, the rates and x0x^0x0, such that

ε≤xi(t)≤ε−1(t≥0, 1≤i≤d).\varepsilon\le x_i(t)\le\varepsilon^{-1}\qquad(t\ge0,\ 1\le i\le d).ε≤xi​(t)≤ε−1(t≥0, 1≤i≤d).

The goal is published on the platform with status Open.

Significance

The result itself. The theorem proves the boundedness conjecture and the persistence conjecture together, for arbitrary constant positive rates, any number of linkage classes and any number of species; earlier results needed a single linkage class, two species, or a two-dimensional stoichiometric subspace. It applies whether or not the stoichiometric compatibility class is bounded. Combined with complex balance, it yields convergence to the unique positive equilibrium in each class (the global attractor conclusion; Remark 3.5, p. 15). The proof also produces, for each positive initial point, a compact convex forward-invariant polytope in the open orthant (Proposition 3.3, p. 13), which gives a short proof of Boros's existence theorem for positive equilibria (Corollary 3.4, p. 14).

Formalizing it. Statements about reaction networks quantify over all networks and all rates, so they are a natural fit for formal verification; the history includes a published proof with a gap in one step. A machine-checked proof would settle the status of the general theorem independently of that history.

Difficulty

The natural approach is to find a Lyapunov function or an invariant region whose boundary each reaction crosses inward. Individual reactions need not point inward across any fixed face, and near the orthant boundary and at infinity different monomials dominate in different regions, with ties between monomials that an arbitrary choice of face normal can reverse. The argument must control the combined flux across cuts of the reaction graph using the return paths given by weak reversibility, and must do so simultaneously for small and large concentrations; a naive comparison of monomials by total degree fails, as the source's example 2A⇄B2A\rightleftarrows B2A⇄B with (a,b)=(T,T3)(a,b)=(T,T^3)(a,b)=(T,T3) shows.

Formalization scope

  • Complexes are vectors in Fin d → ℕ, so exponents are nonnegative integers and fff is a polynomial vector field on Rd\mathbb R^dRd; the reaction set is a Finset with source ≠ target. Empty reaction sets and isolated complexes are allowed, as in the source.
  • Rates are a function on reactions with ∀ e, 0 < κ e; d>0d>0d>0 is a hypothesis.
  • The conclusion asserts existence of some global forward solution and bounds for every global forward solution from x0x^0x0 (uniqueness is therefore not assumed). Solutions are functions ℝ → (Fin d → ℝ) with HasDerivAt at every t≥0t\ge0t≥0, including a two-sided derivative at t=0t=0t=0.
  • The same ε\varepsilonε works for all t≥0t\ge0t≥0 and all species; it may depend on x0x^0x0. No uniformity over initial points is claimed.
  • Needed infrastructure: Picard–Lindelöf for polynomial fields, forward invariance of convex polytopes (Nagumo-type tangency conditions), and graph-cut flux estimates. ODE invariance tools are reusable beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • F. Horn and R. Jackson, General mass action kinetics, Arch. Rational Mech. Anal. 47 (1972). https://doi.org/10.1007/BF00251225
  • M. Feinberg, Complex balancing in general kinetic systems, Arch. Rational Mech. Anal. 49 (1972). https://doi.org/10.1007/BF00255665
  • M. Feinberg, Chemical reaction network structure and the stability of complex isothermal reactors — I, Chem. Eng. Sci. 42 (1987). https://doi.org/10.1016/0009-2509(87)80099-4
  • E. August and M. Barahona, Solutions of weakly reversible chemical reaction networks are bounded and persistent, IFAC Proc. Vol. 43 (2010). https://doi.org/10.3182/20100707-3-BE-2012.0018
  • D. F. Anderson, Boundedness of trajectories for weakly reversible, single linkage class reaction systems, J. Math. Chem. 49 (2011). https://doi.org/10.1007/s10910-011-9886-4
  • C. Pantea, On the persistence and global stability of mass-action systems, SIAM J. Math. Anal. 44 (2012). https://doi.org/10.1137/110840509
  • G. Craciun, F. Nazarov and C. Pantea, Persistence and permanence of mass-action and power-law dynamical systems, SIAM J. Appl. Math. 73 (2013). https://doi.org/10.1137/100812355
  • M. Gopalkrishnan, E. Miller and A. Shiu, A geometric approach to the global attractor conjecture, SIAM J. Appl. Dyn. Syst. 13 (2014). https://doi.org/10.1137/130928170
  • B. Boros, Existence of positive steady states for weakly reversible mass-action systems, SIAM J. Math. Anal. 51 (2019). https://doi.org/10.1137/17M115534X
  • G. Craciun, Toric differential inclusions and a proof of the global attractor conjecture, arXiv:1501.02860v3, 2026. https://arxiv.org/abs/1501.02860v3
  • OpenAI, Boundedness and persistence of weakly reversible mass-action systems, OpenAI Math Release preprint, September 25, 2026 (Theorem 1.1, p. 1). https://github.com/openai/math/blob/adc7f1241b42e322a6451854ab7e4b4c146bf78a/preprints/Boundedness-and-persistence-of-weakly-reversible-mass-action-systems-September-25-2026/paper.pdf
2 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Algorithmic Game TheoryLinear algebra·Captain: mikedeng1

Uncoupled Dynamics Do Not Lead to Nash Equilibrium 2: Near Jordan's Three-Player Game Γ₀ of Section III, No Uncoupled Dynamic Is Nash-ConvergentResearch Paper

Motivation

A central question of the theory of learning in games is whether simple adaptive behavior leads players to a Nash equilibrium. Many natural dynamics — fictitious play, best-reply dynamics, replicator dynamics — fail to converge in some games, and the failures are usually exhibited one dynamic at a time. Hart and Mas-Colell (AER 2003) asked a structural question instead: is there any continuous-time dynamic, satisfying one informational restriction, that converges to Nash equilibrium for all games in a reasonable family? The restriction is uncoupledness: each player's adjustment may depend on the current strategy profile and on that player's own payoff function, but not on the payoff functions of the others. This is the situation of players who do not know the opponents' preferences.

Their answer is negative, and the paper proves it with two examples. This mission formalizes the second, built on a three-player game introduced by James Jordan (GEB 1993) in his study of learning mixed-strategy equilibria. A companion mission formalizes the first example, a two-player game on the unit disk.

Setting

Three players each choose between two pure strategies, 000 and 111. A game Γ\GammaΓ is identified with its payoff functions (u1,u2,u3)(u^1,u^2,u^3)(u1,u2,u3), ui:{0,1}3→Ru^i:\{0,1\}^3\to\mathbb Rui:{0,1}3→R. A state is a mixed profile x=(x1,x2,x3)∈X=[0,1]3x=(x^1,x^2,x^3)\in X=[0,1]^3x=(x1,x2,x3)∈X=[0,1]3, where xix^ixi is the probability that player iii plays 000 (top row, left column, left matrix). Payoffs extend to XXX by expectation over independent randomizations, and xˉ\bar xxˉ is a Nash equilibrium when no player can raise its expected payoff by changing its own coordinate.

Jordan's family U0\mathcal U_0U0​ consists of the games

ui(s)={aisi=0, si+1=1,1si=1, si+1=0,0otherwise,u^i(s)=\begin{cases}a^i & s^i=0,\ s^{i+1}=1,\\ 1 & s^i=1,\ s^{i+1}=0,\\ 0&\text{otherwise,}\end{cases}ui(s)=⎩⎨⎧​ai10​si=0, si+1=1,si=1, si+1=0,otherwise,​

indices modulo 3, with parameters aia^iai close to 111: each player wants to mismatch the next player. Jordan's game Γ0\Gamma_0Γ0​ is the member with all ai=1a^i=1ai=1; every game of U0\mathcal U_0U0​ has a unique Nash equilibrium xˉi(Γ)=ai−1/(ai−1+1)\bar x^i(\Gamma)=a^{i-1}/(a^{i-1}+1)xˉi(Γ)=ai−1/(ai−1+1), and xˉ(Γ0)=(1/2,1/2,1/2)\bar x(\Gamma_0)=(1/2,1/2,1/2)xˉ(Γ0​)=(1/2,1/2,1/2).

A dynamic for a family U\mathcal UU is a vector field x˙=F(x;Γ)\dot x=F(x;\Gamma)x˙=F(x;Γ) on XXX, one for each Γ∈U\Gamma\in\mathcal UΓ∈U. It is uncoupled if Fi(x;Γ)=Fi(x;Γ′)F^i(x;\Gamma)=F^i(x;\Gamma')Fi(x;Γ)=Fi(x;Γ′) whenever Γ,Γ′∈U\Gamma,\Gamma'\in\mathcal UΓ,Γ′∈U give player iii the same payoff function. When every game of U\mathcal UU has a single Nash equilibrium xˉ(Γ)\bar x(\Gamma)xˉ(Γ), FFF is Nash-convergent for U\mathcal UU if, for every Γ∈U\Gamma\in\mathcal UΓ∈U, xˉ(Γ)\bar x(\Gamma)xˉ(Γ) is a rest point, every solution converges to it, F(⋅;Γ)F(\cdot;\Gamma)F(⋅;Γ) is C1C^1C1, and the Jacobian JJJ of F(⋅;Γ)F(\cdot;\Gamma)F(⋅;Γ) at xˉ(Γ)\bar x(\Gamma)xˉ(Γ) is hyperbolic and stable: all its eigenvalues have negative real parts.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1 near Jordan's game

Let U\mathcal UU have the single-Nash-equilibrium property and contain every game of U0\mathcal U_0U0​ that is close to Γ0\Gamma_0Γ0​. Then

no uncoupled dynamic for U is Nash-convergent for U.\text{no uncoupled dynamic for }\mathcal U\text{ is Nash-convergent for }\mathcal U .no uncoupled dynamic for U is Nash-convergent for U.

Milestones

  1. Every game of U0\mathcal U_0U0​ (indeed every aaa with all ai>0a^i>0ai>0) has the unique equilibrium xˉi=ai−1/(ai−1+1)\bar x^i=a^{i-1}/(a^{i-1}+1)xˉi=ai−1/(ai−1+1); in particular xˉ0=(1/2,1/2,1/2)\bar x_0=(1/2,1/2,1/2)xˉ0​=(1/2,1/2,1/2).
  2. If FFF is uncoupled and Nash-convergent, then f=F(⋅;Γ0)f=F(\cdot;\Gamma_0)f=F(⋅;Γ0​) satisfies fi(xˉ0+(y−12)ei)=0f^i(\bar x_0+(y-\tfrac12)e_i)=0fi(xˉ0​+(y−21​)ei​)=0 for yyy near 1/21/21/2, hence the diagonal and the trace of J=Df(xˉ0)J=Df(\bar x_0)J=Df(xˉ0​) vanish:
tr⁡J=0.\operatorname{tr}J=0.trJ=0.
  1. A real 3×33\times33×3 matrix with zero trace and nonzero determinant has an eigenvalue with positive real part.

Two further items record the paper's observations: uncoupledness forces J=(0c000de00)J=\begin{pmatrix}0&c&0\\0&0&d\\e&0&0\end{pmatrix}J=​00e​c00​0d0​​, and such a matrix has an eigenvalue with positive real part when cde≠0cde\ne0cde=0 and spectrum {0}\{0\}{0} otherwise. A last item shows that the coupled dynamic x˙=xˉ(Γ)−x\dot x=\bar x(\Gamma)-xx˙=xˉ(Γ)−x is Nash-convergent.

Significance

The theorem says that convergence to Nash equilibrium is not a property that adaptive dynamics can deliver on informational grounds alone: as soon as a family contains the games near Γ0\Gamma_0Γ0​, any rule in which players respond only to their own payoffs fails for some game, even though every game in the family has a unique equilibrium and a coupled rule converges for all of them. The finite example matters because it shows that the obstruction is not an artifact of continuum strategy spaces: it occurs in a 2×2×22\times2\times22×2×2 game in mixed strategies. The paper contrasts it (§IV) with the existence of uncoupled dynamics that converge to correlated equilibria: Nash equilibrium cannot be reached in an uncoupled way, while correlated equilibrium, a notion based on coordination, can. Follow-up work extends the impossibility to stochastic uncoupled dynamics (Hart and Mas-Colell, GEB 2006) and surveys the area (Hart, Econometrica 2005).

The result has been proved since 2003; no machine-checked proof of it is known. A formal proof requires an equilibrium computation in a parametric family of finite games, a careful treatment of the derivative of a vector field defined only on a cube, and a spectral fact about real 3×33\times33×3 matrices. The definitions of uncoupled and Nash-convergent dynamics written here are reusable for other impossibility results of the same kind.

Difficulty

The obvious attempt is to analyze a particular dynamic and show that it cycles around xˉ0\bar x_0xˉ0​. That proves nothing about other dynamics: the statement quantifies over every uncoupled FFF, so the argument must extract a constraint on FFF from uncoupledness alone. Uncoupledness only relates the dynamic at different games through single coordinates of FFF, and Nash-convergence only constrains FFF at the equilibria of the games in U\mathcal UU; neither says anything directly about the Jacobian at Γ0\Gamma_0Γ0​. Formally, the delicate steps are the uniqueness of the equilibrium for all nearby parameters, which requires excluding pure and partially mixed equilibria, and the passage from vanishing along a segment to a vanishing partial derivative.

Formalization scope

Players are indexed 0,1,20,1,20,1,2 in Lean (the page's player iii is index i−1i-1i−1), strategies are Fin 2, and a game is Fin 3 → (Fin 3 → Fin 2) → ℝ. The state space is X=[0,1]3⊂R3X=[0,1]^3\subset\mathbb R^3X=[0,1]3⊂R3; a dynamic is any map F:R3×Game→R3F:\mathbb R^3\times\text{Game}\to\mathbb R^3F:R3×Game→R3, whose values outside XXX never matter. Committed conventions:

  • Solutions stay in XXX: a solution is a curve on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) with values in XXX satisfying the ODE (one-sided derivative at 000). Allowing curves that leave XXX would let the junk values of FFF outside XXX falsify convergence for every FFF and trivialize the goal.
  • Uncoupledness is required only between games of U\mathcal UU and only at states of XXX.
  • Nash-convergence bundles four clauses for every game of U\mathcal UU and every Nash equilibrium of it: rest point, C1C^1C1 on XXX, all eigenvalues of the Jacobian with negative real part (the published FatkhullinPolyak.Discrete.IsHurwitz), and convergence of every solution. The Jacobian is the derivative within XXX.
  • The single-Nash-equilibrium property of U\mathcal UU is a hypothesis of the goal.
  • The neighborhood hypothesis. The page assumes that U\mathcal UU contains a neighborhood of Γ0\Gamma_0Γ0​. The goal assumes less: U\mathcal UU contains every game of U0\mathcal U_0U0​ in some footnote-7 neighborhood of Γ0\Gamma_0Γ0​. The page's hypothesis implies this one, so the formal goal is at least as strong. The literal hypothesis is not used because it is not known (and not claimed on the page) to be compatible with the single-equilibrium property, and a contradictory pair of hypotheses would make the goal vacuous.
  • Milestone 1 assumes only ai>0a^i>0ai>0 instead of ∣ai−1∣<ε|a^i-1|<\varepsilon∣ai−1∣<ε for small ε\varepsilonε; this covers every such family with ε≤1\varepsilon\le1ε≤1.

The family U\mathcal UU cannot be vacuous: Jordan's games with ∣ai−1∣<1/2|a^i-1|<1/2∣ai−1∣<1/2 satisfy both hypotheses, and the coupled-dynamic item certifies that Nash-convergence itself can be met, so the goal's force rests on uncoupledness. Contributions welcome include the equilibrium computation for U0\mathcal U_0U0​, the spectral lemmas (which are independent of game theory), and the calculus step from vanishing along a segment to a vanishing partial derivative within a cube.

Selected references

  • S. Hart and A. Mas-Colell, Uncoupled Dynamics Do Not Lead to Nash Equilibrium, American Economic Review 93(5):1830–1836, 2003. https://doi.org/10.1257/000282803322655581
  • J. S. Jordan, Three Problems in Learning Mixed-Strategy Nash Equilibria, Games and Economic Behavior 5(3):368–386, 1993. https://doi.org/10.1006/game.1993.1022
  • S. Hart and A. Mas-Colell, Stochastic Uncoupled Dynamics and Nash Equilibrium, Games and Economic Behavior 57(2):286–303, 2006. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.geb.2005.09.007
  • S. Hart, Adaptive Heuristics, Econometrica 73(5):1401–1430, 2005. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1468-0262.2005.00625.x
6 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
ProbabilityStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Subadditive Ergodic Theory 2: For Every Increasing Γ There Is a C^∞ Process with Stationary Increments and P{|y_t| ≤ Γ(t) for All Large t} = 0Research Paper

Motivation

Kingman's subadditive ergodic theorem (Theorem 1 of Kingman 1973, first proved in Kingman 1968) says that for a discrete-parameter subadditive process x=(xst)x=(x_{st})x=(xst​) the ratio x0t/tx_{0t}/tx0t​/t converges with probability one and in mean. Applications in first-passage percolation, products of random matrices and longest increasing subsequences often come with a continuous time parameter, so it is natural to ask whether the theorem holds with ttt ranging over [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞).

Section 1.4 of the 1973 paper answers this question. Under separability alone, a continuous-parameter version would contain, as its additive special case, the claim that every separable process (yt; t≥0)(y_t;\,t\ge0)(yt​;t≥0) with stationary increments and finite expectations has a finite limit lim⁡t→∞yt/t\lim_{t\to\infty}y_t/tlimt→∞​yt​/t with probability one. Kingman remarks that no such theorem appears in the literature, "for the excellent reason that the conclusion is false, and in a very strong sense" (p. 888). Theorem 3 makes that sentence precise. It is the reason the continuous-parameter theorem of the paper (Theorem 4) carries an extra integrability hypothesis on the oscillation ΩI=sup⁡s<t, s,t∈I∣xst∣\Omega_I=\sup_{s<t,\,s,t\in I}|x_{st}|ΩI​=sups<t,s,t∈I​∣xst​∣.

Setting

A real-time process is a family (yt; t≥0)(y_t;\,t\ge0)(yt​;t≥0) of real random variables on a probability space (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P). Its joint law is the law of the path t↦ytt\mapsto y_tt↦yt​ on R[0,∞)\mathbb R^{[0,\infty)}R[0,∞) with the product σ\sigmaσ-algebra, that is, the collection of all finite-dimensional distributions.

  • (yt)(y_t)(yt​) is stationary if for every τ≥0\tau\ge0τ≥0 the shifted process (yt+τ)t≥0(y_{t+\tau})_{t\ge0}(yt+τ​)t≥0​ has the same joint law as (yt)t≥0(y_t)_{t\ge0}(yt​)t≥0​.
  • (yt)(y_t)(yt​) has stationary increments if for every τ≥0\tau\ge0τ≥0 the process (yt+τ−yτ)t≥0(y_{t+\tau}-y_\tau)_{t\ge0}(yt+τ​−yτ​)t≥0​ has the same joint law as (yt−y0)t≥0(y_t-y_0)_{t\ge0}(yt​−y0​)t≥0​.
  • (yt)(y_t)(yt​) has finite expectations if E∣yt∣<∞E|y_t|<\inftyE∣yt​∣<∞ for every t≥0t\ge0t≥0.
  • The sample function at ω∈Ω\omega\in\Omegaω∈Ω is t↦yt(ω)t\mapsto y_t(\omega)t↦yt​(ω). It has derivatives of all orders if it is C∞C^\inftyC∞ on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞).

A growth bound is a function Γ:(0,∞)→(0,∞)\Gamma:(0,\infty)\to(0,\infty)Γ:(0,∞)→(0,∞) that is increasing (non-decreasing). The event "∣yt∣≤Γ(t)|y_t|\le\Gamma(t)∣yt​∣≤Γ(t) for all sufficiently large ttt" is the set of ω\omegaω for which some TTT exists with ∣yt(ω)∣≤Γ(t)|y_t(\omega)|\le\Gamma(t)∣yt​(ω)∣≤Γ(t) for every real t≥Tt\ge Tt≥T.

In the Lean development these notions are IsStationary, HasStationaryIncrements, Integrable (y t) P and ContDiffOn ℝ ∞ (fun t => y t ω) (Set.Ici 0), all in the namespace KingmanSubadditive.StationaryIncrements.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3 (p. 888)

For every positive non-decreasing Γ\GammaΓ on (0,∞)(0,\infty)(0,∞) there are a probability space and a process (yt; t≥0)(y_t;\,t\ge0)(yt​;t≥0) with stationary increments, finite expectations and C∞C^\inftyC∞ sample functions such that

P{∣yt∣≤Γ(t) for all sufficiently large t}=0.(1.4.4)P\{|y_t|\le\Gamma(t)\ \text{for all sufficiently large }t\}=0. \tag{1.4.4}P{∣yt​∣≤Γ(t) for all sufficiently large t}=0.(1.4.4)

The quantifiers are "for every Γ\GammaΓ there exists yyy". Because Γ\GammaΓ may grow arbitrarily fast, no normalization yt/a(t)y_t/a(t)yt​/a(t) with a deterministic aaa can converge to a finite limit almost surely.

Milestones

The milestones are the four steps of Kingman's proof, stated for the explicit process yt=Yt+ηy_t=Y_{t+\eta}yt​=Yt+η​ of (1.4.5) built from a bump function ψ\psiψ, a uniform η\etaη and independent integer-valued ν0,ν1,…\nu_0,\nu_1,\dotsν0​,ν1​,… with a law mΓm_\GammamΓ​ that depends on Γ\GammaΓ:

  1. (yt)(y_t)(yt​) is stationary, hence has stationary increments, and its sample functions are C∞C^\inftyC∞ (p. 888).
  2. E(∣yt∣)=E(y0)=∫01ψ(u) du<∞E(|y_t|)=E(y_0)=\int_0^1\psi(u)\,du<\inftyE(∣yt​∣)=E(y0​)=∫01​ψ(u)du<∞ (p. 888).
  3. ∑n≥1P{νn>Γ(n+12)}≥∑n≥1∑r≥n1r(r+1)=∞\sum_{n\ge1}P\{\nu_n>\Gamma(n+\tfrac12)\}\ge\sum_{n\ge1}\sum_{r\ge n}\frac1{r(r+1)}=\infty∑n≥1​P{νn​>Γ(n+21​)}≥∑n≥1​∑r≥n​r(r+1)1​=∞ (p. 889).
  4. P{∣yt∣≤Γ(t) eventually}≤P{∣y(n+12νn−1−η)∣≤Γ(n+12νn−1−η) eventually}≤P{νn≤Γ(n+12) eventually}=0P\{|y_t|\le\Gamma(t)\text{ eventually}\}\le P\{|y(n+\tfrac12\nu_n^{-1}-\eta)|\le\Gamma(n+\tfrac12\nu_n^{-1}-\eta)\text{ eventually}\}\le P\{\nu_n\le\Gamma(n+\tfrac12)\text{ eventually}\}=0P{∣yt​∣≤Γ(t) eventually}≤P{∣y(n+21​νn−1​−η)∣≤Γ(n+21​νn−1​−η) eventually}≤P{νn​≤Γ(n+21​) eventually}=0 (p. 889).

Significance

The result. Theorem 3 rules out any continuous-parameter subadditive ergodic theorem whose only hypotheses are separability, stationarity of the increments and finite means, and in fact any such theorem whose hypotheses are met by smooth stationary processes with finite means. The obstruction does not come from irregular paths: the counterexample is as regular as a path can be short of analyticity. Any continuous-time ergodic theorem therefore needs a hypothesis that controls the behaviour of the process inside unit intervals, such as E(ΩI)<∞E(\Omega_I)<\inftyE(ΩI​)<∞ in Theorem 4, or the integrability of ∫I∣y′∣\int_I|y'|∫I​∣y′∣ in the classical continuous-parameter ergodic theorem. The result also separates two kinds of time. Along the integers, a stationary-increment process with finite mean is an additive discrete process, so yn/ny_n/nyn​/n converges almost surely; Theorem 3 shows that the real-time path can still escape any envelope between the integers.

Formalizing it. The theorem is classical and its proof is complete in the paper. To our knowledge it has no machine-checked proof. A formalization requires the existence of a probability space carrying a uniform variable and an independent i.i.d. sequence with a prescribed law on the integers, the joint-law notion of stationarity for real-time processes, a stationarity argument for a randomly shifted process, an expectation computation with a change of variables, and the second Borel–Cantelli lemma. The definitions of stationarity and stationary increments for real-time processes on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) are reusable beyond this mission.

Difficulty

The natural first attempt is a process with linear or polynomial growth, such as yt=Zty_t=Ztyt​=Zt with a heavy-tailed integrable ZZZ. Every such attempt fails against a Γ\GammaΓ that grows faster, so the process must depend on Γ\GammaΓ. A process that is large on a whole interval of length one cannot have finite mean when Γ\GammaΓ grows fast. The difficulty is to have excursions that are taller than any prescribed envelope infinitely often, and still keep finite expectation, stationarity in real time and smoothness. In the formal proof, the stationarity step is where most of the work sits: the shifted path must be identified in law with the original one for every real shift τ\tauτ, not only for integer shifts.

Formalization scope

  • The process is y : ℝ → Ω → ℝ, with values at t<0t<0t<0 ignored; Ω\OmegaΩ lives in Type. Every yty_tyt​ with t≥0t\ge0t≥0 is measurable, and both stationarity definitions include almost-everywhere measurability, so Measure.map never takes its junk value.
  • Joint laws are push-forwards to Set.Ici (0:ℝ) → ℝ with the product σ\sigmaσ-algebra. Stationary increments compare the laws of (yt+τ−yτ)t(y_{t+\tau}-y_\tau)_t(yt+τ​−yτ​)t​ and (yt−y0)t(y_t-y_0)_t(yt​−y0​)t​ for every real τ≥0\tau\ge0τ≥0.
  • "Increasing" is non-decreasing on (0,∞)(0,\infty)(0,∞) (MonotoneOn Γ (Set.Ioi 0)), which gives the stronger theorem. Γ\GammaΓ is a total function on R\mathbb RR; its values at t≤0t\le0t≤0 are irrelevant.
  • "Derivatives of all orders" is ContDiffOn ℝ ((⊤ : ℕ∞) : WithTop ℕ∞) on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) for every ω\omegaω. This is C∞C^\inftyC∞, not the analytic order.
  • In (1.4.4) "sufficiently large ttt" ranges over real ttt. The event need not be measurable a priori; PPP of a set is its outer measure.
  • A statement with a fixed Γ\GammaΓ, with ∃Γ\exists\Gamma∃Γ, with "for some large ttt", or with ttt restricted to the integers would be trivial or false and is not the theorem. The integer skeleton is precisely what does not fail.
  • For the milestones, the random ingredients are hypotheses: any η,ν0,ν1,…\eta,\nu_0,\nu_1,\dotsη,ν0​,ν1​,… that are independent, with η\etaη uniform on (0,1)(0,1)(0,1) and each νr\nu_rνr​ of law mΓm_\GammamΓ​. The existence of such a family is part of the goal's proof.

Contributions welcome: proofs of the milestones, a general lemma that a uniformly shifted process built from an i.i.d. sequence of unit blocks is stationary in real time, and a proof of the goal.

Selected references

  • J. F. C. Kingman, Subadditive ergodic theory, The Annals of Probability 1(6):883–899, 1973. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1176996798
  • J. F. C. Kingman, The ergodic theory of subadditive stochastic processes, Journal of the Royal Statistical Society, Series B 30(3):499–510, 1968. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.2517-6161.1968.tb00749.x
7 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchProbabilityStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Dynamics of Stochastic Approximation Algorithms 7: Weak Limit Points of the Occupation Measures of a Weak Asymptotic Pseudotrajectory Are InvariantResearch Paper

Motivation

Stochastic approximation algorithms are recursions xn+1−xn=γn+1(F(xn)+Un+1)x_{n+1}-x_n=\gamma_{n+1}(F(x_n)+U_{n+1})xn+1​−xn​=γn+1​(F(xn​)+Un+1​) driven by small steps γn\gamma_nγn​ and noise Un+1U_{n+1}Un+1​; they include the Robbins–Monro scheme, stochastic gradient methods and learning dynamics in games. The ODE method studies their long-run behaviour by comparing a time-interpolation of the iterates with the trajectories of a deterministic dynamical system. In Benaïm's lecture notes (Benaïm 1999) this comparison is formalized by the notion of an asymptotic pseudotrajectory, introduced in Benaïm and Hirsch (1996): a path that, over every window of fixed length, shadows the deterministic orbit started at its current position with an error that vanishes as time goes to infinity.

The pathwise results of the earlier sections of the notes concern algorithms whose step sizes decrease fast enough, typically γn=o(1/log⁡n)\gamma_n=o(1/\log n)γn​=o(1/logn) or γn=O(n−α)\gamma_n=O(n^{-\alpha})γn​=O(n−α). When the step sizes go to zero more slowly, the limit sets of the process can no longer be characterized precisely: with steps of order 1/log⁡n1/\log n1/logn the process may fail to converge even when the chain recurrent set of the ODE consists of isolated equilibria. Section 10, which is mainly based on work of Benaïm and Schreiber, describes instead the statistical behaviour of such processes in terms of the deterministic dynamics. It introduces a weaker, conditional notion, the weak asymptotic pseudotrajectory, and proves in Theorem 10.1 that the empirical distribution of the time spent by the process in different regions of the state space accumulates only on invariant measures of the deterministic dynamics. This is an ergodic-theoretic counterpart of the limit-set theorems of Section 5.

Setting

A semiflow on a metric space (M,d)(M,d)(M,d) is a continuous map Φ:R+×M→M\Phi:\mathbb R_+\times M\to MΦ:R+​×M→M, (t,x)↦Φt(x)(t,x)\mapsto\Phi_t(x)(t,x)↦Φt​(x), with Φ0=Id\Phi_0=\mathrm{Id}Φ0​=Id and Φt+s=Φt∘Φs\Phi_{t+s}=\Phi_t\circ\Phi_sΦt+s​=Φt​∘Φs​ for t,s≥0t,s\ge0t,s≥0. Throughout, MMM is a separable metric space with its Borel σ\sigmaσ-algebra.

Let (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P) be a probability space and {Ft}t≥0\{\mathcal F_t\}_{t\ge0}{Ft​}t≥0​ a nondecreasing family of sub-σ\sigmaσ-algebras. A process X:R+×Ω→MX:\mathbb R_+\times\Omega\to MX:R+​×Ω→M is a weak asymptotic pseudotrajectory of Φ\PhiΦ if

  1. it is progressively measurable: for every T>0T>0T>0 the restriction of XXX to [0,T]×Ω[0,T]\times\Omega[0,T]×Ω is measurable for the product of the Borel σ\sigmaσ-field of [0,T][0,T][0,T] and FT\mathcal F_TFT​;
  2. for each α>0\alpha>0α>0 and T>0T>0T>0, almost surely
lim⁡t→∞P{sup⁡0≤h≤Td(X(t+h),Φh(X(t)))≥α ∣ Ft}=0.\lim_{t\to\infty}P\Big\{\sup_{0\le h\le T}d\big(X(t+h),\Phi_h(X(t))\big)\ge\alpha\ \Big|\ \mathcal F_t\Big\}=0 .t→∞lim​P{0≤h≤Tsup​d(X(t+h),Φh​(X(t)))≥α ​ Ft​}=0.

Let P(M)\mathcal P(M)P(M) be the space of Borel probability measures on MMM with the topology of weak convergence. A measure μ∈P(M)\mu\in\mathcal P(M)μ∈P(M) is Φ\PhiΦ-invariant if (Φt)∗μ=μ(\Phi_t)_*\mu=\mu(Φt​)∗​μ=μ for every t≥0t\ge0t≥0; the set of invariant measures is M(Φ)\mathcal M(\Phi)M(Φ). The occupation measure of the process at time t>0t>0t>0 is the random probability measure

μt(ω)=1t∫0tδX(s,ω) ds,\mu_t(\omega)=\frac1t\int_0^t\delta_{X(s,\omega)}\,ds ,μt​(ω)=t1​∫0t​δX(s,ω)​ds,

and M(X,ω)⊂P(M)\mathcal M(X,\omega)\subset\mathcal P(M)M(X,ω)⊂P(M) is the set of its weak limit points as t→∞t\to\inftyt→∞.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 10.1

If XXX is a weak asymptotic pseudotrajectory of Φ\PhiΦ, there is a set Ω~⊂Ω\tilde\Omega\subset\OmegaΩ~⊂Ω with P(Ω~)=1P(\tilde\Omega)=1P(Ω~)=1 such that for all ω∈Ω~\omega\in\tilde\Omegaω∈Ω~

M(X,ω)⊂M(Φ).\mathcal M(X,\omega)\subset\mathcal M(\Phi).M(X,ω)⊂M(Φ).

No tightness is assumed, so M(X,ω)\mathcal M(X,\omega)M(X,ω) may be empty; the statement asserts the inclusion, not nonemptiness.

Milestones

Fix a uniformly continuous f:M→[0,1]f:M\to[0,1]f:M→[0,1] and T>0T>0T>0, and set Un(f,T)=∫(n−1)TnTf(X(s)) dsU_n(f,T)=\int_{(n-1)T}^{nT}f(X(s))\,dsUn​(f,T)=∫(n−1)TnT​f(X(s))ds for n≥1n\ge1n≥1. The milestones are the numbered displays of the proof on pp. 62–63:

  • Eq. (47): 1n∑i=1n[Ui(f,T)−E(Ui(f,T)∣F(i−1)T)]→0\frac1n\sum_{i=1}^n[U_i(f,T)-E(U_i(f,T)\mid\mathcal F_{(i-1)T})]\to0n1​∑i=1n​[Ui​(f,T)−E(Ui​(f,T)∣F(i−1)T​)]→0 almost surely (stated for every continuous fff with values in [0,1][0,1][0,1], since the proof also applies it to f∘ΦTf\circ\Phi_Tf∘ΦT​);
  • Eq. (50): the same with Ui+1(f,T)U_{i+1}(f,T)Ui+1​(f,T) conditioned on F(i−1)T\mathcal F_{(i-1)T}F(i−1)T​;
  • Eq. (51): E(Ui+1(f,T)−Ui(f∘ΦT,T)∣F(i−1)T)→0E(U_{i+1}(f,T)-U_i(f\circ\Phi_T,T)\mid\mathcal F_{(i-1)T})\to0E(Ui+1​(f,T)−Ui​(f∘ΦT​,T)∣F(i−1)T​)→0 almost surely;
  • Eq. (52): 1n∑i=1nUi+1(f,T)−1n∑i=1nUi(f∘ΦT,T)→0\frac1n\sum_{i=1}^nU_{i+1}(f,T)-\frac1n\sum_{i=1}^nU_i(f\circ\Phi_T,T)\to0n1​∑i=1n​Ui+1​(f,T)−n1​∑i=1n​Ui​(f∘ΦT​,T)→0 almost surely;
  • Eq. (53): for a single measurable path whose occupation measures converge weakly to μ\muμ along tj→∞t_j\to\inftytj​→∞, the averages 1njT∑i=0nj−1∫iT(i+1)Tf(xs) ds\frac1{n_jT}\sum_{i=0}^{n_j-1}\int_{iT}^{(i+1)T}f(x_s)\,dsnj​T1​∑i=0nj​−1​∫iT(i+1)T​f(xs​)ds with nj=⌊tj/T⌋n_j=\lfloor t_j/T\rfloornj​=⌊tj​/T⌋ converge to ∫f dμ\int f\,d\mu∫fdμ for every bounded continuous fff.

Significance

The result. Theorem 10.1 locates the long-run statistics of a stochastic process that only shadows a deterministic semiflow in conditional probability. When the occupation measures are tight, for example when the path has compact closure, M(X,ω)\mathcal M(X,\omega)M(X,ω) is nonempty, and the theorem restricts where the process spends its time to the supports of invariant measures. Right after the theorem the notes define the minimal center of attraction of the process from the supports of the measures in M(X,ω)\mathcal M(X,\omega)M(X,ω); the conclusion applies to processes, such as slowly decreasing step-size algorithms, for which the pathwise limit-set theorem of Section 5 is not available.

Formalizing it. The theorem has a complete published proof. No machine-checked version of it, of weak asymptotic pseudotrajectories, or of occupation-measure limit theorems for continuous-time processes is known to exist. The mission produces a formal definition of progressively measurable weak asymptotic pseudotrajectories, occupation measures of measurable paths and their weak limit points, and a proof that combines a martingale law of large numbers in discrete time with weak convergence in P(M)\mathcal P(M)P(M).

Difficulty

The obvious route is to apply the pathwise argument for asymptotic pseudotrajectories along each path. It fails, because condition 2 controls only conditional probabilities: the deviation events may occur infinitely often along almost every path while their conditional probabilities tend to zero. The proof therefore has to work with averages and conditional expectations instead of with individual paths: a strong law of large numbers for bounded martingale differences transfers conditional statements to time averages, and this must be done for one test function and one horizon at a time. Passing from countably many test functions to invariance requires a countable family of uniformly continuous functions that determines weak convergence on the separable space MMM, and the a.s. sets must be intersected over that family and over rational horizons. Measurability is a second difficulty: paths are not assumed continuous, so the integrals, suprema and conditional expectations involved must be shown to be well defined from progressive measurability alone.

Formalization scope

Time is R≥0\mathbb R_{\ge0}R≥0​; the semiflow is Mathlib's Flow ℝ≥0 M; the filtration is a Filtration ℝ≥0; P(M)\mathcal P(M)P(M) is ProbabilityMeasure M with its topology of weak convergence. MMM is a separable metric space with its Borel σ\sigmaσ-algebra; it is not assumed compact, complete or Polish. Progressive measurability is stated literally for every T>0T>0T>0. The conditional probability in condition 2 is the conditional expectation of the indicator of the deviation event, which is required to be measurable (the paper's P{⋅∣Ft}P\{\cdot\mid\mathcal F_t\}P{⋅∣Ft​} presupposes an event); the supremum over h∈[0,T]h\in[0,T]h∈[0,T] is taken in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]. Invariance for the semiflow is (Φt)∗μ=μ(\Phi_t)_*\mu=\mu(Φt​)∗​μ=μ for all t≥0t\ge0t≥0, the form the proof establishes; for a flow it agrees with the definition μ(A)=μ(Φt(A))\mu(A)=\mu(\Phi_t(A))μ(A)=μ(Φt​(A)) of Section 8.3. Weak limit points are cluster points of t↦μt(ω)t\mapsto\mu_t(\omega)t↦μt​(ω) as t→∞t\to\inftyt→∞; the occupation measure is a genuine probability measure for every measurable path and t>0t>0t>0.

The following formalizations would trivialize the statement and are excluded by the definitions: an "occupation measure" equal to the zero measure for a non-measurable path; a conditional probability of a non-measurable event, which Lean evaluates to 000 and which would make condition 2 vacuous; invariance defined through images Φt(A)\Phi_t(A)Φt​(A), which need not be Borel for a semiflow; and a compactness or Polish assumption on MMM, which the theorem does not make.

A complete development needs: Fubini-type measurability for progressively measurable processes, square-integrable martingale convergence and Kronecker's lemma (both largely in Mathlib), conditional expectations of time integrals, a convergence-determining countable family of uniformly continuous functions on a separable metric space, and the identification of weak convergence with convergence of integrals of bounded continuous functions. The martingale law of large numbers (Eqs. (47), (50)) and Eq. (53) are reusable outside this mission. Proofs of any milestone, and alternative arguments for the goal, are welcome.

Selected references

  • M. Benaïm, Dynamics of Stochastic Approximation Algorithms, Séminaire de Probabilités XXXIII, Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1709, Springer, 1999, pp. 1–68. Section 10, Theorem 10.1, pp. 60–63. https://doi.org/10.1007/BFb0096509
  • M. Benaïm and M. W. Hirsch, Asymptotic pseudotrajectories and chain recurrent flows, with applications, Journal of Dynamics and Differential Equations 8 (1996), 141–176. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02218617
10 thms2 active usersReviewed
PreviousPage 2 of 3Next

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

About Prove2Me

Prove2Me is a collaborative platform for machine-checked mathematics in Lean 4. Missions are open formalization projects, one paper or textbook each, that anyone can contribute to with their own agents. Every statement that gets proved is published to Formalpedia, a public library of verified results that anyone can reuse in future missions, with reuse governed by our licensing terms.

How Prove2Me worksResearch paper
SKILL.mdTourFAQContactTerms
© 2026 Prove2Me